POSTCONF(5)                                                        POSTCONF(5)



NAME
       postconf - Postfix configuration parameters

SYNOPSIS
       postconf parameter ...

       postconf -e "parameter=value" ...

DESCRIPTION
       The  Postfix main.cf configuration file specifies a small subset of all
       the parameters that control the operation of the Postfix  mail  system.
       Parameters not specified in main.cf are left at their default values.

       The general format of the main.cf file is as follows:

       o      Each  logical line has the form "parameter = value".  Whitespace
              around the "=" is ignored, as is whitespace at the end of a log-
              ical line.

       o      Empty  lines and whitespace-only lines are ignored, as are lines
              whose first non-whitespace character is a `#'.

       o      A logical line starts with  non-whitespace  text.  A  line  that
              starts with whitespace continues a logical line.

       o      A parameter value may refer to other parameters.

              o      The  expressions  "$name",  "${name}"  or  "$(name)"  are
                     recursively replaced by the value of the named parameter.

              o      The  expression  "${name?value}"  expands to "value" when
                     "$name" is non-empty. This form is supported with Postfix
                     version 2.2 and later.

              o      The  expression  "${name:value}"  expands to "value" when
                     "$name" is empty. This form  is  supported  with  Postfix
                     version 2.2 and later.

              o      Specify "$$" to produce a single "$" character.

       o      When the same parameter is defined multiple times, only the last
              instance is remembered.

       o      Otherwise, the order of main.cf parameter definitions  does  not
              matter.

       The remainder of this document is a description of all Postfix configu-
       ration parameters. Default values are shown after the parameter name in
       parentheses, and can be looked up with the "postconf -d" command.

       Note:  this  is not an invitation to make changes to Postfix configura-
       tion parameters. Unnecessary changes can impair the  operation  of  the
       mail system.

2bounce_notice_recipient (default: postmaster)
       The  recipient  of  undeliverable  mail  that cannot be returned to the
       sender.  This feature is enabled with the notify_classes parameter.

access_map_reject_code (default: 554)
       The numerical Postfix SMTP  server  response  code  when  a  client  is
       rejected by an access(5) map restriction.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

address_verify_default_transport (default: $default_transport)
       Overrides the default_transport parameter setting for address verifica-
       tion probes.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_local_transport (default: $local_transport)
       Overrides  the  local_transport parameter setting for address verifica-
       tion probes.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_map (default: empty)
       Optional lookup table for persistent address verification status  stor-
       age.   The  table is maintained by the verify(8) service, and is opened
       before the process releases privileges.

       By default, the information is kept in volatile  memory,  and  is  lost
       after "postfix reload" or "postfix stop".

       Specify a location in a file system that will not fill up. If the data-
       base becomes corrupted, the world comes to an end.  To  recover  delete
       the file and do "postfix reload".

       As  of version 2.5, Postfix no longer uses root privileges when opening
       this file. The file  should  now  be  stored  under  the  Postfix-owned
       data_directory. As a migration aid, an attempt to open the file under a
       non-Postfix directory is redirected to  the  Postfix-owned  data_direc-
       tory, and a warning is logged.

       Examples:

       address_verify_map = hash:/var/db/postfix/verify
       address_verify_map = btree:/var/db/postfix/verify

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_negative_cache (default: yes)
       Enable caching of failed address verification probe results.  When this
       feature is enabled, the cache may pollute quickly with  garbage.   When
       this  feature  is  disabled, Postfix will generate an address probe for
       every lookup.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_negative_expire_time (default: 3d)
       The time after which a failed probe expires from the address  verifica-
       tion cache.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_negative_refresh_time (default: 3h)
       The  time  after  which a failed address verification probe needs to be
       refreshed.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_poll_count (default: 3)
       How many times to query the verify(8) service for the completion of  an
       address verification request in progress.

       The default poll count is 3.

       Specify  1  to  implement  a crude form of greylisting, that is, always
       defer the first delivery request for a never seen before address.

       Example:

       address_verify_poll_count = 1

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_poll_delay (default: 3s)
       The delay between queries for the completion of an address verification
       request in progress.

       The default polling delay is 3 seconds.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_positive_expire_time (default: 31d)
       The  time after which a successful probe expires from the address veri-
       fication cache.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_positive_refresh_time (default: 7d)
       The time after which a successful address verification probe  needs  to
       be  refreshed.  The address verification status is not updated when the
       probe fails (optimistic caching).

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_relay_transport (default: $relay_transport)
       Overrides the relay_transport parameter setting for  address  verifica-
       tion probes.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_relayhost (default: $relayhost)
       Overrides  the  relayhost  parameter  setting  for address verification
       probes. This information can be overruled with the transport(5)  table.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_sender (default: $double_bounce_sender)
       The  sender  address  to  use  in address verification probes; prior to
       Postfix 2.5 the  default  was  "postmaster".  To  avoid  problems  with
       address probes that are sent in response to address probes, the Postfix
       SMTP server excludes the probe sender address  from  all  SMTPD  access
       blocks.

       Specify  an  empty value (address_verify_sender =) or <> if you want to
       use the null sender address. Beware, some sites reject  mail  from  <>,
       even though RFCs require that such addresses be accepted.

       Examples:

       address_verify_sender = <>
       address_verify_sender = postmaster@my.domain

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_sender_dependent_relayhost_maps     (default:    $sender_depen-
       dent_relayhost_maps)
       Overrides the  sender_dependent_relayhost_maps  parameter  setting  for
       address verification probes.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

address_verify_service_name (default: verify)
       The  name  of  the verify(8) address verification service. This service
       maintains the status of sender and/or  recipient  address  verification
       probes, and generates probes on request by other Postfix processes.

address_verify_transport_maps (default: $transport_maps)
       Overrides the transport_maps parameter setting for address verification
       probes.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_virtual_transport (default: $virtual_transport)
       Overrides the virtual_transport parameter setting for address verifica-
       tion probes.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

alias_database (default: see postconf -d output)
       The  alias  databases  for  local(8)  delivery  that  are  updated with
       "newaliases" or with "sendmail -bi".

       This is a separate configuration parameter because not all  the  tables
       specified with $alias_maps have to be local files.

       Examples:

       alias_database = hash:/etc/aliases
       alias_database = hash:/etc/mail/aliases

alias_maps (default: see postconf -d output)
       The alias databases that are used for local(8) delivery. See aliases(5)
       for syntax details.

       The default list is system dependent.  On systems with NIS, the default
       is to search the local alias database, then the NIS alias database.

       If  you  change  the  alias  database, run "postalias /etc/aliases" (or
       wherever your system  stores  the  mail  alias  file),  or  simply  run
       "newaliases" to build the necessary DBM or DB file.

       The  local(8)  delivery agent disallows regular expression substitution
       of $1 etc. in alias_maps, because that would open a security hole.

       The local(8) delivery agent will silently ignore requests  to  use  the
       proxymap(8)  server  within  alias_maps. Instead it will open the table
       directly. Before Postfix version 2.2, the local(8) delivery agent  will
       terminate with a fatal error.

       Examples:

       alias_maps = hash:/etc/aliases, nis:mail.aliases
       alias_maps = hash:/etc/aliases

allow_mail_to_commands (default: alias, forward)
       Restrict  local(8)  mail delivery to external commands.  The default is
       to disallow delivery to "|command" in :include:  files (see  aliases(5)
       for the text that defines this terminology).

       Specify  zero  or more of: alias, forward or include, in order to allow
       commands in aliases(5), .forward files or in :include:  files,  respec-
       tively.

       Example:

       allow_mail_to_commands = alias,forward,include

allow_mail_to_files (default: alias, forward)
       Restrict  local(8)  mail  delivery to external files. The default is to
       disallow "/file/name" destinations in :include:  files (see  aliases(5)
       for the text that defines this terminology).

       Specify  zero  or more of: alias, forward or include, in order to allow
       "/file/name"  destinations  in  aliases(5),  .forward  files   and   in
       :include:  files, respectively.

       Example:

       allow_mail_to_files = alias,forward,include

allow_min_user (default: no)
       Allow a sender or recipient address to have `-' as the first character.
       By default, this is not allowed, to avoid accidents with software  that
       passes email addresses via the command line. Such software would not be
       able to distinguish a malicious address from a bona  fide  command-line
       option.  Although this can be prevented by inserting a "--" option ter-
       minator into the command line, this is  difficult  to  enforce  consis-
       tently and globally.

       As  of  Postfix version 2.5, this feature is implemented by trivial-re-
       write(8).  With  earlier  versions  this  feature  was  implemented  by
       qmgr(8) and was limited to recipient addresses only.

allow_percent_hack (default: yes)
       Enable  the rewriting of the form "user%domain" to "user@domain".  This
       is enabled by default.

       Note: with Postfix version 2.2, message header address  rewriting  hap-
       pens only when one of the following conditions is true:

       o      The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

       o      The  message  is  received  from  a  network client that matches
              $local_header_rewrite_clients,

       o      The  message   is   received   from   the   network,   and   the
              remote_header_rewrite_domain  parameter  specifies  a  non-empty
              value.

       To   get   the   behavior   before   Postfix   version   2.2,   specify
       "local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

       Example:

       allow_percent_hack = no

allow_untrusted_routing (default: no)
       Forward  mail  with sender-specified routing (user[@%!]remote[@%!]site)
       from untrusted clients to destinations matching $relay_domains.

       By default, this feature is turned off.  This closes a nasty open relay
       loophole  where  a  backup  MX host can be tricked into forwarding junk
       mail to a primary MX host which then spams it out to the world.

       This parameter also controls if non-local addresses with  sender-speci-
       fied  routing  can  match  Postfix  access  tables.  By  default,  such
       addresses cannot match Postfix access tables, because  the  address  is
       ambiguous.

alternate_config_directories (default: empty)
       A  list  of  non-default  Postfix configuration directories that may be
       specified with "-c config_directory" on the command line,  or  via  the
       MAIL_CONFIG environment parameter.

       This list must be specified in the default Postfix configuration direc-
       tory, and is used by set-gid Postfix commands such as postqueue(1)  and
       postdrop(1).

always_bcc (default: empty)
       Optional  address  that  receives a "blind carbon copy" of each message
       that is received by the Postfix mail system.

       Note: if mail to the BCC address bounces it will  be  returned  to  the
       sender.

       Note:  automatic  BCC  recipients  are  produced only for new mail.  To
       avoid mailer loops, automatic BCC recipients are not generated for mail
       that  Postfix  forwards internally, nor for mail that Postfix generates
       itself.

anvil_rate_time_unit (default: 60s)
       The time unit over which client connection rates and  other  rates  are
       calculated.

       This  feature is implemented by the anvil(8) service which is available
       in Postfix version 2.2 and later.

       The default interval is relatively short. Because of the high frequency
       of updates, the anvil(8) server uses volatile memory only. Thus, infor-
       mation is lost whenever the process terminates.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

anvil_status_update_time (default: 600s)
       How  frequently  the  anvil(8) connection and rate limiting server logs
       peak usage information.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

append_at_myorigin (default: yes)
       With  locally  submitted  mail,  append the string "@$myorigin" to mail
       addresses without domain information.  With  remotely  submitted  mail,
       append the string "@$remote_header_rewrite_domain" instead.

       Note  1: this feature is enabled by default and must not be turned off.
       Postfix does not support domain-less addresses.

       Note 2: with Postfix version 2.2, message header address rewriting hap-
       pens only when one of the following conditions is true:

       o      The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

       o      The  message  is  received  from  a  network client that matches
              $local_header_rewrite_clients,

       o      The  message   is   received   from   the   network,   and   the
              remote_header_rewrite_domain  parameter  specifies  a  non-empty
              value.

       To   get   the   behavior   before   Postfix   version   2.2,   specify
       "local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

append_dot_mydomain (default: yes)
       With   locally  submitted  mail,  append  the  string  ".$mydomain"  to
       addresses that have no ".domain" information. With  remotely  submitted
       mail, append the string ".$remote_header_rewrite_domain" instead.

       Note 1: this feature is enabled by default. If disabled, users will not
       be able to send mail to "user@partialdomainname" but will have to spec-
       ify full domain names instead.

       Note 2: with Postfix version 2.2, message header address rewriting hap-
       pens only when one of the following conditions is true:

       o      The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

       o      The message is received  from  a  network  client  that  matches
              $local_header_rewrite_clients,

       o      The   message   is   received   from   the   network,   and  the
              remote_header_rewrite_domain  parameter  specifies  a  non-empty
              value.

       To   get   the   behavior   before   Postfix   version   2.2,   specify
       "local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

application_event_drain_time (default: 100s)
       How long the postkick(1) command waits  for  a  request  to  enter  the
       server's input buffer before giving up.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

authorized_flush_users (default: static:anyone)
       List of users who are authorized to flush the queue.

       By default, all users are allowed to flush the queue.  Access is always
       granted if the invoking user is the super-user or the $mail_owner user.
       Otherwise, the real UID of the process is looked up in the system pass-
       word  file,  and access is granted only if the corresponding login name
       is on the access list.  The username "unknown" is  used  for  processes
       whose real UID is not found in the password file.

       Specify  a  list  of user names, "/file/name" or "type:table" patterns,
       separated by commas and/or whitespace. The  list  is  matched  left  to
       right,  and the search stops on the first match. A "/file/name" pattern
       is replaced by its contents; a "type:table"  lookup  table  is  matched
       when  a name matches a lookup key (the lookup result is ignored).  Con-
       tinue long lines by starting the next  line  with  whitespace.  Specify
       "!pattern"  to  exclude a name from the list. The form "!/file/name" is
       supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

authorized_mailq_users (default: static:anyone)
       List of users who are authorized to view the queue.

       By default, all users are allowed to view the queue.  Access is  always
       granted if the invoking user is the super-user or the $mail_owner user.
       Otherwise, the real UID of the process is looked up in the system pass-
       word  file,  and access is granted only if the corresponding login name
       is on the access list.  The username "unknown" is  used  for  processes
       whose real UID is not found in the password file.

       Specify  a  list  of user names, "/file/name" or "type:table" patterns,
       separated by commas and/or whitespace. The  list  is  matched  left  to
       right,  and the search stops on the first match. A "/file/name" pattern
       is replaced by its contents; a "type:table"  lookup  table  is  matched
       when  a name matches a lookup key (the lookup result is ignored).  Con-
       tinue long lines by starting the next  line  with  whitespace.  Specify
       "!pattern" to exclude a user name from the list. The form "!/file/name"
       is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

authorized_submit_users (default: static:anyone)
       List of users who are authorized to submit mail  with  the  sendmail(1)
       command (and with the privileged postdrop(1) helper command).

       By  default, all users are allowed to submit mail.  Otherwise, the real
       UID of the process is looked up in the system password file, and access
       is  granted only if the corresponding login name is on the access list.
       The username "unknown" is used for processes  whose  real  UID  is  not
       found in the password file. To deny mail submission access to all users
       specify an empty list.

       Specify a list of user names, "/file/name"  or  "type:table"  patterns,
       separated  by  commas  and/or  whitespace.  The list is matched left to
       right, and the search stops on the first match. A "/file/name"  pattern
       is  replaced  by  its  contents; a "type:table" lookup table is matched
       when a name matches a lookup key (the lookup result is ignored).   Con-
       tinue  long  lines  by  starting the next line with whitespace. Specify
       "!pattern" to exclude a user name from the list. The form "!/file/name"
       is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

       Example:

       authorized_submit_users = !www, static:all

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

authorized_verp_clients (default: $mynetworks)
       What  SMTP clients are allowed to specify the XVERP command.  This com-
       mand requests that mail be delivered one recipient at a time with a per
       recipient return address.

       By default, only trusted clients are allowed to specify XVERP.

       This  parameter  was introduced with Postfix version 1.1.  Postfix ver-
       sion 2.1 renamed this parameter  to  smtpd_authorized_verp_clients  and
       changed the default to none.

       Specify  a list of network/netmask patterns, separated by commas and/or
       whitespace. The mask specifies the number of bits in the  network  part
       of a host address. You can also specify hostnames or .domain names (the
       initial  dot  causes  the  domain  to  match  any   name   below   it),
       "/file/name"  or  "type:table"  patterns.   A  "/file/name"  pattern is
       replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup table is matched when a
       table  entry  matches  a  lookup string (the lookup result is ignored).
       Continue long lines by starting the next line with whitespace.  Specify
       "!pattern"  to  exclude  an address or network block from the list. The
       form "!/file/name" is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and  later.

       Note:  IP  version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
       the  authorized_verp_clients  value,  and  in  files   specified   with
       "/file/name".   IP  version  6 addresses contain the ":" character, and
       would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

backwards_bounce_logfile_compatibility (default: yes)
       Produce additional bounce(8) logfile records that can be read by  Post-
       fix versions before 2.0. The current and more extensible "name = value"
       format is needed in order to implement more  sophisticated  functional-
       ity.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

berkeley_db_create_buffer_size (default: 16777216)
       The per-table I/O buffer size for programs that create Berkeley DB hash
       or btree tables.  Specify a byte count.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

berkeley_db_read_buffer_size (default: 131072)
       The per-table I/O buffer size for programs that read Berkeley  DB  hash
       or btree tables.  Specify a byte count.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

best_mx_transport (default: empty)
       Where  the  Postfix  SMTP  client should deliver mail when it detects a
       "mail loops back to myself" error  condition.  This  happens  when  the
       local  MTA is the best SMTP mail exchanger for a destination not listed
       in   $mydestination,   $inet_interfaces,    $proxy_interfaces,    $vir-
       tual_alias_domains, or $virtual_mailbox_domains.  By default, the Post-
       fix SMTP client returns such mail as undeliverable.

       Specify, for example, "best_mx_transport = local" to pass the mail from
       the Postfix SMTP client to the local(8) delivery agent. You can specify
       any message delivery "transport" or "transport:nexthop" that is defined
       in  the master.cf file. See the transport(5) manual page for the syntax
       and meaning of "transport" or "transport:nexthop".

       However, this feature is expensive because it ties up  a  Postfix  SMTP
       client  process while the local(8) delivery agent is doing its work. It
       is more efficient (for Postfix) to list all hosted domains in  a  table
       or database.

biff (default: yes)
       Whether  or not to use the local biff service.  This service sends "new
       mail" notifications to users who have requested new  mail  notification
       with the UNIX command "biff y".

       For  compatibility  reasons  this feature is on by default.  On systems
       with lots of interactive users, the biff service can be  a  performance
       drain.  Specify "biff = no" in main.cf to disable.

body_checks (default: empty)
       Optional  lookup  tables  for  content  inspection  as specified in the
       body_checks(5) manual page.

       Note: with Postfix versions before 2.0, these rules inspect all content
       after the primary message headers.

body_checks_size_limit (default: 51200)
       How  much  text in a message body segment (or attachment, if you prefer
       to use that term) is subjected to body_checks inspection.   The  amount
       of text is limited to avoid scanning huge attachments.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

bounce_notice_recipient (default: postmaster)
       The  recipient  of postmaster notifications with the message headers of
       mail that Postfix did not deliver and of SMTP conversation  transcripts
       of mail that Postfix did not receive.  This feature is enabled with the
       notify_classes parameter.

bounce_queue_lifetime (default: 5d)
       The maximal time a bounce message is queued  before  it  is  considered
       undeliverable.  By default, this is the same as the queue life time for
       regular mail.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is d (days).

       Specify 0 when mail delivery should be tried only once.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

bounce_service_name (default: bounce)
       The  name  of the bounce(8) service. This service maintains a record of
       failed delivery attempts and generates non-delivery notifications.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

bounce_size_limit (default: 50000)
       The maximal amount of original message text that  is  sent  in  a  non-
       delivery  notification.  Specify  a  byte  count.  If you increase this
       limit, then you should increase the  mime_nesting_limit  value  propor-
       tionally.

bounce_template_file (default: empty)
       Pathname  of a configuration file with bounce message templates.  These
       override the built-in templates of delivery status  notification  (DSN)
       messages for undeliverable mail, for delayed mail, successful delivery,
       or delivery verification. The bounce(5) manual page  describes  how  to
       edit and test template files.

       Template message body text may contain $name references to Postfix con-
       figuration parameters. The result of $name expansion can  be  previewed
       with "postconf -b file_name" before the file is placed into the Postfix
       configuration directory.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

broken_sasl_auth_clients (default: no)
       Enable inter-operability with SMTP clients that implement  an  obsolete
       version  of  the  AUTH command (RFC 4954). Examples of such clients are
       MicroSoft Outlook Express version 4 and MicroSoft Exchange version 5.0.

       Specify "broken_sasl_auth_clients = yes" to have Postfix advertise AUTH
       support in a non-standard way.

canonical_classes     (default:      envelope_sender,      envelope_recipient,
       header_sender, header_recipient)
       What  addresses  are  subject  to  canonical_maps  address mapping.  By
       default, canonical_maps address mapping is applied to  envelope  sender
       and  recipient  addresses,  and  to  header sender and header recipient
       addresses.

       Specify  one   or   more   of:   envelope_sender,   envelope_recipient,
       header_sender, header_recipient

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

canonical_maps (default: empty)
       Optional   address  mapping  lookup  tables  for  message  headers  and
       envelopes.  The  mapping  is  applied  to  both  sender  and  recipient
       addresses,  in  both  envelopes  and in headers, as controlled with the
       canonical_classes parameter. This is typically used to clean  up  dirty
       addresses from legacy mail systems, or to replace login names by First-
       name.Lastname.  The table format and lookups are documented in  canoni-
       cal(5).  For  an  overview  of  Postfix  address  manipulations see the
       ADDRESS_REWRITING_README document.

       If you use this feature, run "postmap /etc/postfix/canonical" to  build
       the  necessary  DBM  or  DB  file  after every change. The changes will
       become visible after a minute or so.  Use "postfix reload" to eliminate
       the delay.

       Note:  with Postfix version 2.2, message header address mapping happens
       only when message header address rewriting is enabled:

       o      The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

       o      The message is received  from  a  network  client  that  matches
              $local_header_rewrite_clients,

       o      The   message   is   received   from   the   network,   and  the
              remote_header_rewrite_domain  parameter  specifies  a  non-empty
              value.

       To   get   the   behavior   before   Postfix   version   2.2,   specify
       "local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

       Examples:

       canonical_maps = dbm:/etc/postfix/canonical
       canonical_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/canonical

cleanup_service_name (default: cleanup)
       The name of the cleanup(8) service.  This  service  rewrites  addresses
       into  the  standard form, and performs canonical(5) address mapping and
       virtual(5) aliasing.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

command_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
       The location of all postfix administrative commands.

command_execution_directory (default: empty)
       The local(8) delivery agent working directory for delivery to  external
       command.   Failure  to  change  directory  causes  the  delivery  to be
       deferred.

       The following $name expansions are done on  command_execution_directory
       before  the  directory  is changed. Expansion happens in the context of
       the delivery request.  The result of $name expansion is  filtered  with
       the character set that is specified with the execution_directory_expan-
       sion_filter parameter.

       $user  The recipient's username.

       $shell The recipient's login shell pathname.

       $home  The recipient's home directory.

       $recipient
              The full recipient address.

       $extension
              The optional recipient address extension.

       $domain
              The recipient domain.

       $local The entire recipient localpart.

       $recipient_delimiter
              The system-wide recipient address extension delimiter.

       ${name?value}
              Expands to value when $name is non-empty.

       ${name:value}
              Expands to value when $name is empty.

       Instead of $name you can also specify ${name} or $(name).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

command_expansion_filter (default: see postconf -d output)
       Restrict the characters that the  local(8)  delivery  agent  allows  in
       $name  expansions of $mailbox_command and $command_execution_directory.
       Characters outside the allowed set are replaced by underscores.

command_time_limit (default: 1000s)
       Time limit for delivery to external commands. This limit is used by the
       local(8)  delivery agent, and is the default time limit for delivery by
       the pipe(8) delivery agent.

       Note: if you set this time limit to a large value you must  update  the
       global ipc_timeout parameter as well.

config_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
       The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf configuration
       files. This can be overruled via the following mechanisms:

       o      The MAIL_CONFIG environment variable (daemon processes and  com-
              mands).

       o      The "-c" command-line option (commands only).

       With  Postfix command that run with set-gid privileges, a config_direc-
       tory override requires either root privileges, or it requires that  the
       directory  is listed with the alternate_config_directories parameter in
       the default main.cf file.

connection_cache_protocol_timeout (default: 5s)
       Time limit for connection cache connect, send  or  receive  operations.
       The time limit is enforced in the client.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

connection_cache_service_name (default: scache)
       The name of the scache(8) connection cache service.  This service main-
       tains a limited pool of cached sessions.

connection_cache_status_update_time (default: 600s)
       How frequently the scache(8) server logs usage statistics with  connec-
       tion cache hit and miss rates for logical destinations and for physical
       endpoints.

connection_cache_ttl_limit (default: 2s)
       The maximal time-to-live value  that  the  scache(8)  connection  cache
       server  allows.  Requests that specify a larger TTL will be stored with
       the maximum allowed TTL. The purpose of this additional control  is  to
       protect  the  infrastructure  against careless people. The cache TTL is
       already bounded by $max_idle.

content_filter (default: empty)
       The name of a mail delivery transport that filters  mail  after  it  is
       queued.

       This parameter uses the same syntax as the right-hand side of a Postfix
       transport(5) table. This setting has a lower precedence than a  content
       filter   that   is   specified   with   an  access(5)  table  or  in  a
       header_checks(5) or body_checks(5) table.

cyrus_sasl_config_path (default: empty)
       Search path for Cyrus SASL application configuration  files,  currently
       used  only  to  locate the $smtpd_sasl_path.conf file.  Specify zero or
       more directories separated by a colon character, or an empty  value  to
       use Cyrus SASL's built-in search path.

       This  feature  is available in Postfix 2.5 and later when compiled with
       Cyrus SASL 2.1.22 or later.

daemon_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
       The directory with Postfix support programs and daemon programs.  These
       should  not  be invoked directly by humans. The directory must be owned
       by root.

daemon_timeout (default: 18000s)
       How much time a Postfix daemon process may take  to  handle  a  request
       before it is terminated by a built-in watchdog timer.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

data_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
       The directory with Postfix-writable data files  (for  example:  caches,
       pseudo-random numbers).  This directory must be owned by the mail_owner
       account, and must not be shared with non-Postfix software.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

debug_peer_level (default: 2)
       The increment in verbose logging level when a remote client  or  server
       matches a pattern in the debug_peer_list parameter.

debug_peer_list (default: empty)
       Optional  list  of  remote client or server hostname or network address
       patterns that cause the verbose logging level to increase by the amount
       specified in $debug_peer_level.

       Specify  domain  names, network/netmask patterns, "/file/name" patterns
       or  "type:table"  lookup  tables.  The  right-hand  side  result   from
       "type:table" lookups is ignored.

       Pattern   matching   of   domain   names  is  controlled  by  the  par-
       ent_domain_matches_subdomains parameter.

       Examples:

       debug_peer_list = 127.0.0.1
       debug_peer_list = some.domain

debugger_command (default: empty)
       The external command to  execute  when  a  Postfix  daemon  program  is
       invoked with the -D option.

       Use  "command  .. & sleep 5" so that the debugger can attach before the
       process marches on. If you use an X-based debugger, be sure to  set  up
       your XAUTHORITY environment variable before starting Postfix.

       Example:

       debugger_command =
           PATH=/usr/bin:/usr/X11R6/bin
           ddd $daemon_directory/$process_name $process_id & sleep 5

default_database_type (default: see postconf -d output)
       The  default  database  type for use in newaliases(1), postalias(1) and
       postmap(1) commands. On many UNIX systems the default  type  is  either
       dbm  or  hash. The default setting is frozen when the Postfix system is
       built.

       Examples:

       default_database_type = hash
       default_database_type = dbm

default_delivery_slot_cost (default: 5)
       How often the Postfix queue manager's scheduler is allowed  to  preempt
       delivery of one message with another.

       Each  transport maintains a so-called "available delivery slot counter"
       for each message. One message can be preempted by another one when  the
       other  message  can  be  delivered  using no more delivery slots (i.e.,
       invocations of delivery agents) than the current  message  counter  has
       accumulated  (or  will  eventually  accumulate  -  see about slot loans
       below). This parameter controls how often is the counter incremented  -
       it  happens  after each default_delivery_slot_cost recipients have been
       delivered.

       The cost of 0 is used to disable the preempting scheduling  completely.
       The minimum value the scheduling algorithm can use is 2 - use it if you
       want to maximize the message throughput rate. Although there is no max-
       imum, it doesn't make much sense to use values above say 50.

       The  only  reason why the value of 2 is not the default is the way this
       parameter affects the delivery of mailing-list mail. In the worst case,
       their   delivery   can   take   somewhere   between  (cost+1/cost)  and
       (cost/cost-1) times more than if the preemptive scheduler was disabled.
       The default value of 5 turns out to provide reasonable message response
       times while making sure the mailing-list deliveries are not extended by
       more than 20-25 percent even in the worst case.

       Use  transport_delivery_slot_cost to specify a transport-specific over-
       ride, where transport is the master.cf name  of  the  message  delivery
       transport.

       Examples:

       default_delivery_slot_cost = 0
       default_delivery_slot_cost = 2

default_delivery_slot_discount (default: 50)
       The  default  value for transport-specific _delivery_slot_discount set-
       tings.

       This parameter speeds up the moment when a message preemption can  hap-
       pen.  Instead  of  waiting  until  the  full  amount  of delivery slots
       required is available, the preemption can happen when  transport_deliv-
       ery_slot_discount  percent of the required amount plus transport_deliv-
       ery_slot_loan still remains to be  accumulated.   Note  that  the  full
       amount  will still have to be accumulated before another preemption can
       take place later.

       Use transport_delivery_slot_discount to  specify  a  transport-specific
       override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
       transport.

default_delivery_slot_loan (default: 3)
       The default value for transport-specific _delivery_slot_loan  settings.

       This  parameter speeds up the moment when a message preemption can hap-
       pen. Instead of  waiting  until  the  full  amount  of  delivery  slots
       required  is available, the preemption can happen when transport_deliv-
       ery_slot_discount percent of the required amount plus  transport_deliv-
       ery_slot_loan  still  remains  to  be  accumulated.  Note that the full
       amount will still have to be accumulated before another preemption  can
       take place later.

       Use  transport_delivery_slot_loan to specify a transport-specific over-
       ride, where transport is the master.cf name  of  the  message  delivery
       transport.

default_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit (default: 1)
       How  many  pseudo-cohorts  must  suffer connection or handshake failure
       before a specific destination is considered  unavailable  (and  further
       delivery  is suspended). Specify zero to disable this feature. A desti-
       nation's pseudo-cohort failure count is reset each time a delivery com-
       pletes without connection or handshake failure for that specific desti-
       nation.

       A pseudo-cohort is the number of deliveries equal  to  a  destination's
       delivery concurrency.

       Use  transport_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit to specify a
       transport-specific override, where transport is the master.cf  name  of
       the message delivery transport.

       This  feature  is available in Postfix 2.5. The default setting is com-
       patible with earlier Postfix versions.

default_destination_concurrency_limit (default: 20)
       The default maximal number of parallel deliveries to the same  destina-
       tion.  This is the default limit for delivery via the lmtp(8), pipe(8),
       smtp(8) and virtual(8) delivery agents.  With per-destination recipient
       limit > 1, a destination is a domain, otherwise it is a recipient.

       Use transport_destination_concurrency_limit to specify a transport-spe-
       cific override, where transport is the master.cf name  of  the  message
       delivery transport.

default_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback (default: 1)
       The  per-destination  amount of delivery concurrency negative feedback,
       after a delivery completes with  a  connection  or  handshake  failure.
       Feedback  values  are  in the range 0..1 inclusive. With negative feed-
       back, concurrency is decremented at the  beginning  of  a  sequence  of
       length  1/feedback. This is unlike positive feedback, where concurrency
       is incremented at the end of a sequence of length 1/feedback.

       As of Postfix version 2.5, negative  feedback  cannot  reduce  delivery
       concurrency  to  zero.   Instead, a destination is marked dead (further
       delivery  suspended)  after  the  failed  pseudo-cohort  count  reaches
       $default_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit     (or    $trans-
       port_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit).  To make the  sched-
       uler  completely  immune to connection or handshake failures, specify a
       zero feedback value and a zero failed pseudo-cohort limit.

       Specify one of the following forms:

       number

       number / number
              Constant feedback. The value must be in the  range  0..1  inclu-
              sive.   The  default  setting  of "1" is compatible with Postfix
              versions before 2.5, where a destination's delivery  concurrency
              is throttled down to zero (and further delivery suspended) after
              a single failed pseudo-cohort.

       number / concurrency
              Variable feedback of "number  /  (delivery  concurrency)".   The
              number must be in the range 0..1 inclusive. With number equal to
              "1", a destination's delivery concurrency is  decremented  by  1
              after each failed pseudo-cohort.

       A  pseudo-cohort  is  the number of deliveries equal to a destination's
       delivery concurrency.

       Use transport_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback  to  specify  a
       transport-specific  override,  where transport is the master.cf name of
       the message delivery transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5. The default setting  is  com-
       patible with earlier Postfix versions.

default_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback (default: 1)
       The  per-destination  amount of delivery concurrency positive feedback,
       after a delivery completes without  connection  or  handshake  failure.
       Feedback  values  are  in  the  range  0..1 inclusive.  The concurrency
       increases until it  reaches  the  per-destination  maximal  concurrency
       limit. With positive feedback, concurrency is incremented at the end of
       a sequence with length 1/feedback. This is  unlike  negative  feedback,
       where  concurrency  is decremented at the start of a sequence of length
       1/feedback.

       Specify one of the following forms:

       number

       number / number
              Constant feedback.  The value must be in the range  0..1  inclu-
              sive. The default setting of "1" is compatible with Postfix ver-
              sions before 2.5, where  a  destination's  delivery  concurrency
              doubles after each successful pseudo-cohort.

       number / concurrency
              Variable  feedback  of  "number  / (delivery concurrency)".  The
              number must be in the range 0..1 inclusive. With number equal to
              "1",  a  destination's  delivery concurrency is incremented by 1
              after each successful pseudo-cohort.

       A pseudo-cohort is the number of deliveries equal  to  a  destination's
       delivery concurrency.

       Use  transport_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback  to  specify a
       transport-specific override, where transport is the master.cf  name  of
       the message delivery transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

default_destination_rate_delay (default: 0s)
       The  default amount of delay that is inserted between individual deliv-
       eries to the same destination; with per-destination recipient  limit  >
       1, a destination is a domain, otherwise it is a recipient.

       To  enable  the delay, specify a non-zero time value (an integral value
       plus an optional one-letter suffix that specifies the time unit).

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

       NOTE: the delay is enforced by the queue manager. The delay timer state
       does not survive "postfix reload" or "postfix stop".

       Use transport_destination_rate_delay to  specify  a  transport-specific
       override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
       transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

default_destination_recipient_limit (default: 50)
       The default maximal number of recipients per message delivery.  This is
       the  default  limit  for delivery via the lmtp(8), pipe(8), smtp(8) and
       virtual(8) delivery agents.

       Setting this parameter to a value of 1 changes the meaning of the  cor-
       responding  per-destination  concurrency  limit  from  concurrency  per
       domain into concurrency per recipient.

       Use transport_destination_recipient_limit to specify  a  transport-spe-
       cific  override,  where  transport is the master.cf name of the message
       delivery transport.

default_extra_recipient_limit (default: 1000)
       The default value for the extra per-transport limit imposed on the num-
       ber  of  in-memory  recipients.  This extra recipient space is reserved
       for the cases when the Postfix queue manager's scheduler  preempts  one
       message with another and suddenly needs some extra recipients slots for
       the chosen message in order to avoid performance degradation.

       Use transport_extra_recipient_limit  to  specify  a  transport-specific
       override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
       transport.

default_minimum_delivery_slots (default: 3)
       How many recipients a message must have in order to invoke the  Postfix
       queue  manager's  scheduling  algorithm  at  all.  Messages which would
       never accumulate at least this many delivery  slots  (subject  to  slot
       cost parameter as well) are never preempted.

       Use  transport_minimum_delivery_slots  to  specify a transport-specific
       override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
       transport.

default_privs (default: nobody)
       The  default rights used by the local(8) delivery agent for delivery to
       external file or command.  These  rights  are  used  when  delivery  is
       requested from an aliases(5) file that is owned by root, or when deliv-
       ery is done on behalf of root. DO NOT SPECIFY A PRIVILEGED USER OR  THE
       POSTFIX OWNER.

default_process_limit (default: 100)
       The  default  maximal  number of Postfix child processes that provide a
       given service. This limit can be overruled for specific services in the
       master.cf file.

default_rbl_reply (default: see postconf -d output)
       The  default  SMTP  server  response  template  for  a  request that is
       rejected by an RBL-based restriction. This template can be overruled by
       specific entries in the optional rbl_reply_maps lookup table.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

       The template is subject to exactly one level of $name substitution:

       $client
              The  client hostname and IP address, formatted as name[address].

       $client_address
              The client IP address.

       $client_name
              The      client      hostname      or       "unknown".       See
              reject_unknown_client_hostname for more details.

       $reverse_client_name
              The  client  hostname  from  address->name lookup, or "unknown".
              See reject_unknown_reverse_client_hostname for more details.

       $helo_name
              The hostname given in HELO or EHLO command or empty string.

       $rbl_class
              The blacklisted entity type: Client host, Helo  command,  Sender
              address, or Recipient address.

       $rbl_code
              The   numerical  SMTP  response  code,  as  specified  with  the
              maps_rbl_reject_code configuration parameter. Note: The  numeri-
              cal SMTP response code is required, and must appear at the start
              of the reply. With Postfix version 2.3 and later  this  informa-
              tion may be followed by an RFC 3463 enhanced status code.

       $rbl_domain
              The RBL domain where $rbl_what is blacklisted.

       $rbl_reason
              The reason why $rbl_what is blacklisted, or an empty string.

       $rbl_what
              The  entity  that  is  blacklisted (an IP address, a hostname, a
              domain name, or an email address whose domain was  blacklisted).

       $recipient
              The recipient address or <> in case of the null address.

       $recipient_domain
              The recipient domain or empty string.

       $recipient_name
              The recipient address localpart or <> in case of null address.

       $sender
              The sender address or <> in case of the null address.

       $sender_domain
              The sender domain or empty string.

       $sender_name
              The  sender address localpart or <> in case of the null address.

       ${name?text}
              Expands to `text' if $name is not empty.

       ${name:text}
              Expands to `text' if $name is empty.

       Instead of $name you can also specify ${name} or $(name).

       Note: when an enhanced status code is specified in an  RBL  reply  tem-
       plate,  it  is  subject to modification.  The following transformations
       are needed when the same RBL reply template is used for  client,  helo,
       sender, or recipient access restrictions.

       o      When  rejecting  a  sender address, the Postfix SMTP server will
              transform a recipient DSN status (e.g.,  4.1.1-4.1.6)  into  the
              corresponding sender DSN status, and vice versa.

       o      When rejecting non-address information (such as the HELO command
              argument or  the  client  hostname/address),  the  Postfix  SMTP
              server  will  transform  a sender or recipient DSN status into a
              generic non-address DSN status (e.g., 4.0.0).

default_recipient_limit (default: 20000)
       The default per-transport upper limit on the number of in-memory recip-
       ients.  These limits take priority over the global qmgr_message_recipi-
       ent_limit after the message has been assigned to the respective  trans-
       ports.  See also default_extra_recipient_limit and qmgr_message_recipi-
       ent_minimum.

       Use transport_recipient_limit to specify a transport-specific override,
       where  transport  is  the master.cf name of the message delivery trans-
       port.

default_recipient_refill_delay (default: 5s)
       The default per-transport maximum  delay  between  recipients  refills.
       When not all message recipients fit into the memory at once, keep load-
       ing more of them at least once every this many seconds.  This  is  used
       to  make  sure  the  recipients are refilled in timely manner even when
       $default_recipient_refill_limit is too high for too slow deliveries.

       Use transport_recipient_refill_delay to  specify  a  transport-specific
       override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
       transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

default_recipient_refill_limit (default: 100)
       The default per-transport limit on the number of recipients refilled at
       once.   When  not  all  message recipients fit into the memory at once,
       keep loading more of them in batches of at least this many at  a  time.
       See also $default_recipient_refill_delay, which may result in recipient
       batches lower than this when this limit is too high for too slow deliv-
       eries.

       Use  transport_recipient_refill_limit  to  specify a transport-specific
       override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
       transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

default_transport (default: smtp)
       The default mail delivery transport and next-hop destination for desti-
       nations   that   do   not   match   $mydestination,   $inet_interfaces,
       $proxy_interfaces, $virtual_alias_domains, $virtual_mailbox_domains, or
       $relay_domains.  In order of decreasing precedence, the nexthop  desti-
       nation   is  taken  from  $default_transport,  $sender_dependent_relay-
       host_maps, $relayhost, or from the recipient domain.  This  information
       can be overruled with the transport(5) table.

       Specify  a string of the form transport:nexthop, where transport is the
       name of a mail delivery transport defined in master.cf.   The  :nexthop
       part is optional.  For more details see the transport(5) manual page.

       Example:

       default_transport = uucp:relayhostname

default_verp_delimiters (default: +=)
       The  two  default  VERP  delimiter  characters.  These are used when no
       explicit delimiters are specified with the SMTP XVERP command  or  with
       the  "sendmail  -V"  command-line  option.  Specify characters that are
       allowed by the verp_delimiter_filter setting.

       This feature is available in Postfix 1.1 and later.

defer_code (default: 450)
       The numerical Postfix SMTP server response  code  when  a  remote  SMTP
       client request is rejected by the "defer" restriction.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

defer_service_name (default: defer)
       The name of the defer service.  This  service  is  implemented  by  the
       bounce(8) daemon and maintains a record of failed delivery attempts and
       generates non-delivery notifications.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

defer_transports (default: empty)
       The names of message delivery transports that should not  deliver  mail
       unless someone issues "sendmail -q" or equivalent. Specify zero or more
       names of mail delivery transports names that appear in the first  field
       of master.cf.

       Example:

       defer_transports = smtp

delay_logging_resolution_limit (default: 2)
       The  maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging sub-
       second delay values.  Specify a number in the range 0..6.

       Large delay values are rounded off to an integral number seconds; delay
       values  below the delay_logging_resolution_limit are logged as "0", and
       small delay values are logged with at most two-digit precision.

       The format of the "delays=a/b/c/d" logging is as follows:

       o      a = time from message arrival to last active queue entry

       o      b = time from last active queue entry to connection setup

       o      c = time in connection setup, including DNS, EHLO and TLS

       o      d = time in message transmission

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

delay_notice_recipient (default: postmaster)
       The recipient of postmaster notifications with the message  headers  of
       mail that cannot be delivered within $delay_warning_time time units.

       This feature is enabled with the delay_warning_time parameter.

delay_warning_time (default: 0h)
       The  time  after  which the sender receives the message headers of mail
       that is still queued.

       To enable this feature, specify a  non-zero  time  value  (an  integral
       value plus an optional one-letter suffix that specifies the time unit).

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is h (hours).

deliver_lock_attempts (default: 20)
       The  maximal number of attempts to acquire an exclusive lock on a mail-
       box file or bounce(8) logfile.

deliver_lock_delay (default: 1s)
       The time between attempts to acquire an exclusive  lock  on  a  mailbox
       file or bounce(8) logfile.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

destination_concurrency_feedback_debug (default: no)
       Make the queue manager's feedback  algorithm  verbose  for  performance
       analysis purposes.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

detect_8bit_encoding_header (default: yes)
       Automatically detect 8BITMIME body content by looking at Content-Trans-
       fer-Encoding: message headers; historically, this  behavior  was  hard-
       coded to be "always on".

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

disable_dns_lookups (default: no)
       Disable  DNS  lookups  in  the Postfix SMTP and LMTP clients. When dis-
       abled, hosts are looked up with the getaddrinfo() system  library  rou-
       tine which normally also looks in /etc/hosts.

       DNS lookups are enabled by default.

disable_mime_input_processing (default: no)
       Turn  off MIME processing while receiving mail. This means that no spe-
       cial treatment is given to Content-Type: message headers, and that  all
       text  after the initial message headers is considered to be part of the
       message body.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

       Mime input processing is enabled by default, and is needed in order  to
       recognize MIME headers in message content.

disable_mime_output_conversion (default: no)
       Disable  the conversion of 8BITMIME format to 7BIT format.  Mime output
       conversion is needed when the destination does not  advertise  8BITMIME
       support.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

disable_verp_bounces (default: no)
       Disable sending one bounce report per recipient.

       The default, one per recipient, is what ezmlm needs.

       This feature is available in Postfix 1.1 and later.

disable_vrfy_command (default: no)
       Disable  the SMTP VRFY command. This stops some techniques used to har-
       vest email addresses.

       Example:

       disable_vrfy_command = no

dont_remove (default: 0)
       Don't remove queue files and save them to the "saved" mail queue.  This
       is a debugging aid.  To inspect the envelope information and content of
       a Postfix queue file, use the postcat(1) command.

double_bounce_sender (default: double-bounce)
       The sender address of postmaster notifications that  are  generated  by
       the  mail  system.  All  mail to this address is silently discarded, in
       order to terminate mail bounce loops.

duplicate_filter_limit (default: 1000)
       The maximal number of addresses remembered  by  the  address  duplicate
       filter  for  aliases(5)  or virtual(5) alias expansion, or for showq(8)
       queue displays.

empty_address_recipient (default: MAILER-DAEMON)
       The recipient of mail addressed to the null address.  Postfix does  not
       accept  such  addresses in SMTP commands, but they may still be created
       locally as the result of configuration or software error.

empty_address_relayhost_maps_lookup_key (default: <>)
       The sender_dependent_relayhost_maps search string  that  will  be  used
       instead of the null sender address.

       This  feature  is available in Postfix 2.5 and later. With earlier ver-
       sions, sender_dependent_relayhost_maps lookups  were  skipped  for  the
       null sender address.

enable_errors_to (default: no)
       Report mail delivery errors to the address specified with the non-stan-
       dard Errors-To: message header, instead of the envelope sender  address
       (this  feature  is  removed  with Postfix version 2.2, is turned off by
       default with Postfix version 2.1, and is always turned  on  with  older
       Postfix versions).

enable_original_recipient (default: yes)
       Enable  support  for  the  X-Original-To message header. This header is
       needed for multi-recipient mailboxes.

       When this parameter is set  to  yes,  the  cleanup(8)  daemon  performs
       duplicate elimination on distinct pairs of (original recipient, rewrit-
       ten recipient), and generates non-empty original recipient  queue  file
       records.

       When this parameter is set to no, the cleanup(8) daemon performs dupli-
       cate elimination on the rewritten recipient address only, and generates
       empty original recipient queue file records.

       This  feature  is available in Postfix 2.1 and later. With Postfix ver-
       sion 2.0, support for the X-Original-To message header is always turned
       on.  Postfix  versions before 2.0 have no support for the X-Original-To
       message header.

error_notice_recipient (default: postmaster)
       The recipient of postmaster notifications about mail delivery  problems
       that  are  caused  by  policy,  resource,  software or protocol errors.
       These notifications are enabled with the notify_classes parameter.

error_service_name (default: error)
       The name of the error(8) pseudo delivery  agent.  This  service  always
       returns mail as undeliverable.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

execution_directory_expansion_filter (default: see postconf -d output)
       Restrict  the  characters  that  the  local(8) delivery agent allows in
       $name expansions of $command_execution_directory.   Characters  outside
       the allowed set are replaced by underscores.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

expand_owner_alias (default: no)
       When  delivering  to an alias "aliasname" that has an "owner-aliasname"
       companion alias, set the envelope sender address to  the  expansion  of
       the "owner-aliasname" alias. Normally, Postfix sets the envelope sender
       address to the name of the "owner-aliasname" alias.

export_environment (default: see postconf -d output)
       The list of environment variables that a Postfix process will export to
       non-Postfix  processes. The TZ variable is needed for sane time keeping
       on System-V-ish systems.

       Specify a list of names and/or name=value pairs,  separated  by  white-
       space  or  comma. The name=value form is supported with Postfix version
       2.1 and later.

       Example:

       export_environment = TZ PATH=/bin:/usr/bin

extract_recipient_limit (default: 10240)
       The maximal number of recipient addresses  that  Postfix  will  extract
       from message headers when mail is submitted with "sendmail -t".

       This feature was removed in Postfix version 2.1.

fallback_relay (default: empty)
       Optional  list of relay hosts for SMTP destinations that can't be found
       or that are unreachable. With Postfix 2.3 this parameter is renamed  to
       smtp_fallback_relay.

       By  default,  mail  is returned to the sender when a destination is not
       found, and delivery is deferred when a destination is unreachable.

       The fallback relays must be SMTP destinations. Specify a domain,  host,
       host:port,  [host]:port,  [address]  or [address]:port; the form [host]
       turns off MX lookups.  If you specify multiple SMTP destinations, Post-
       fix will try them in the specified order.

       Note:  before  Postfix  2.2, do not use the fallback_relay feature when
       relaying mail for a backup  or  primary  MX  domain.  Mail  would  loop
       between  the Postfix MX host and the fallback_relay host when the final
       destination is unavailable.

       o      In main.cf specify "relay_transport = relay",

       o      In master.cf specify "-o fallback_relay =" (i.e., empty) at  the
              end of the relay entry.

       o      In transport maps, specify "relay:nexthop..."  as the right-hand
              side for backup or primary MX domain entries.

       Postfix version 2.2 and later will not use the  fallback_relay  feature
       for destinations that it is MX host for.

fallback_transport (default: empty)
       Optional  message  delivery  transport that the local(8) delivery agent
       should use for names that are not found in the aliases(5) or UNIX pass-
       word database.

       The  precedence  of  local(8)  delivery  features  from high to low is:
       aliases,  .forward  files,  mailbox_transport_maps,  mailbox_transport,
       mailbox_command_maps,  mailbox_command, home_mailbox, mail_spool_direc-
       tory, fallback_transport_maps, fallback_transport and luser_relay.

fallback_transport_maps (default: empty)
       Optional lookup tables with per-recipient message  delivery  transports
       for  recipients  that the local(8) delivery agent could not find in the
       aliases(5) or UNIX password database.

       The precedence of local(8) delivery  features  from  high  to  low  is:
       aliases,  .forward  files,  mailbox_transport_maps,  mailbox_transport,
       mailbox_command_maps, mailbox_command, home_mailbox,  mail_spool_direc-
       tory, fallback_transport_maps, fallback_transport and luser_relay.

       For  safety  reasons, this feature does not allow $number substitutions
       in regular expression maps.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

fast_flush_domains (default: $relay_domains)
       Optional list of destinations that  are  eligible  for  per-destination
       logfiles with mail that is queued to those destinations.

       By  default,  Postfix maintains "fast flush" logfiles only for destina-
       tions that the Postfix SMTP server is willing to  relay  to  (i.e.  the
       default    is:   "fast_flush_domains   =   $relay_domains";   see   the
       relay_domains parameter in the postconf(5) manual).

       Specify a list of hosts or domains, "/file/name" patterns or  "type:ta-
       ble"  lookup  tables,  separated by commas and/or whitespace.  Continue
       long lines by starting the next line with  whitespace.  A  "/file/name"
       pattern  is  replaced  by  its contents; a "type:table" lookup table is
       matched when the domain or its parent domain appears as lookup key.

       Specify "fast_flush_domains =" (i.e., empty)  to  disable  the  feature
       altogether.

fast_flush_purge_time (default: 7d)
       The  time  after which an empty per-destination "fast flush" logfile is
       deleted.

       You can specify the time as a number, or as a number followed by a let-
       ter  that  indicates  the  time  unit:  s=seconds,  m=minutes, h=hours,
       d=days, w=weeks.  The default time unit is days.

fast_flush_refresh_time (default: 12h)
       The time after which  a  non-empty  but  unread  per-destination  "fast
       flush"  logfile  needs  to be refreshed.  The contents of a logfile are
       refreshed by requesting delivery of all messages listed in the logfile.

       You can specify the time as a number, or as a number followed by a let-
       ter that  indicates  the  time  unit:  s=seconds,  m=minutes,  h=hours,
       d=days, w=weeks.  The default time unit is hours.

fault_injection_code (default: 0)
       Force  specific  internal tests to fail, to test the handling of errors
       that are difficult to reproduce otherwise.

flush_service_name (default: flush)
       The name of the flush(8) service. This service  maintains  per-destina-
       tion  logfiles  with  the  queue  file names of mail that is queued for
       those destinations.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

fork_attempts (default: 5)
       The maximal number of attempts to fork() a child process.

fork_delay (default: 1s)
       The delay between attempts to fork() a child process.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

forward_expansion_filter (default: see postconf -d output)
       Restrict  the  characters  that  the  local(8) delivery agent allows in
       $name expansions of $forward_path.  Characters outside the allowed  set
       are replaced by underscores.

forward_path (default: see postconf -d output)
       The  local(8)  delivery  agent  search list for finding a .forward file
       with user-specified delivery methods. The first file that is  found  is
       used.

       The  following  $name  expansions  are  done on forward_path before the
       search actually happens. The result of $name expansion is filtered with
       the  character  set that is specified with the forward_expansion_filter
       parameter.

       $user  The recipient's username.

       $shell The recipient's login shell pathname.

       $home  The recipient's home directory.

       $recipient
              The full recipient address.

       $extension
              The optional recipient address extension.

       $domain
              The recipient domain.

       $local The entire recipient localpart.

       $recipient_delimiter
              The system-wide recipient address extension delimiter.

       ${name?value}
              Expands to value when $name is non-empty.

       ${name:value}
              Expands to value when $name is empty.

       Instead of $name you can also specify ${name} or $(name).

       Examples:

       forward_path = /var/forward/$user
       forward_path =
           /var/forward/$user/.forward$recipient_delimiter$extension,
           /var/forward/$user/.forward

frozen_delivered_to (default: yes)
       Update the local(8) delivery agent's idea of the Delivered-To:  address
       (see  prepend_delivered_header)  only  once, at the start of a delivery
       attempt; do  not  update  the  Delivered-To:  address  while  expanding
       aliases or .forward files.

       This  feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later. With older Postfix
       releases, the behavior is as if this parameter is set to "no". The  old
       setting  can be expensive with deeply nested aliases or .forward files.
       When an alias or .forward file changes the  Delivered-To:  address,  it
       ties  up  one queue file and one cleanup process instance while mail is
       being forwarded.

hash_queue_depth (default: 1)
       The number of subdirectory levels for queue directories listed with the
       hash_queue_names parameter.

       After changing the hash_queue_names or hash_queue_depth parameter, exe-
       cute the command "postfix reload".

hash_queue_names (default: deferred, defer)
       The names of queue directories that are split across multiple subdirec-
       tory levels.

       Before  Postfix version 2.2, the default list of hashed queues was sig-
       nificantly larger. Claims about improvements in file system  technology
       suggest  that  hashing  of  the incoming and active queues is no longer
       needed. Fewer hashed directories speed up the time  needed  to  restart
       Postfix.

       After changing the hash_queue_names or hash_queue_depth parameter, exe-
       cute the command "postfix reload".

header_address_token_limit (default: 10240)
       The maximal number of address tokens are allowed in an address  message
       header.  Information that exceeds the limit is discarded.  The limit is
       enforced by the cleanup(8) server.

header_checks (default: empty)
       Optional lookup tables for content inspection of primary non-MIME  mes-
       sage headers, as specified in the header_checks(5) manual page.

header_size_limit (default: 102400)
       The maximal amount of memory in bytes for storing a message header.  If
       a header is larger, the excess is discarded.  The limit is enforced  by
       the cleanup(8) server.

helpful_warnings (default: yes)
       Log  warnings  about  problematic  configuration  settings, and provide
       helpful suggestions.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

home_mailbox (default: empty)
       Optional pathname of a mailbox file relative to a local(8) user's  home
       directory.

       Specify a pathname ending in "/" for qmail-style delivery.

       The  precedence  of  local(8)  delivery  features  from high to low is:
       aliases,  .forward  files,  mailbox_transport_maps,  mailbox_transport,
       mailbox_command_maps,  mailbox_command, home_mailbox, mail_spool_direc-
       tory, fallback_transport_maps, fallback_transport and luser_relay.

       Examples:

       home_mailbox = Mailbox
       home_mailbox = Maildir/

hopcount_limit (default: 50)
       The maximal number of Received:  message headers that is allowed in the
       primary  message  headers. A message that exceeds the limit is bounced,
       in order to stop a mailer loop.

html_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
       The location of Postfix HTML files that describe how to build,  config-
       ure or operate a specific Postfix subsystem or feature.

ignore_mx_lookup_error (default: no)
       Ignore  DNS MX lookups that produce no response.  By default, the Post-
       fix SMTP client defers delivery and tries again after some delay.  This
       behavior is required by the SMTP standard.

       Specify  "ignore_mx_lookup_error  = yes" to force a DNS A record lookup
       instead. This violates the SMTP standard and can result in mis-delivery
       of mail.

import_environment (default: see postconf -d output)
       The  list  of environment parameters that a Postfix process will import
       from a non-Postfix parent process. Examples of relevant parameters:

       TZ     Needed for sane time keeping on most System-V-ish systems.

       DISPLAY
              Needed for debugging Postfix daemons with an X-windows debugger.

       XAUTHORITY
              Needed for debugging Postfix daemons with an X-windows debugger.

       MAIL_CONFIG
              Needed to make "postfix -c" work.

       Specify a list of names and/or name=value pairs,  separated  by  white-
       space  or  comma. The name=value form is supported with Postfix version
       2.1 and later.

in_flow_delay (default: 1s)
       Time to pause before accepting a new message, when the message  arrival
       rate  exceeds  the  message delivery rate. This feature is turned on by
       default (it's disabled on SCO UNIX due to an SCO bug).

       With the default 100 SMTP server process limit,  "in_flow_delay  =  1s"
       limits  the  mail inflow to 100 messages per second above the number of
       messages delivered per second.

       Specify 0 to disable the feature. Valid delays are 0..10.

inet_interfaces (default: all)
       The network interface addresses that this mail system receives mail on.
       Specify  "all" to receive mail on all network interfaces (default), and
       "loopback-only" to receive mail on  loopback  network  interfaces  only
       (Postfix  version 2.2 and later).  The parameter also controls delivery
       of mail to user@[ip.address].

       Note 1: you need to stop and start Postfix when this parameter changes.

       Note 2: address information may be enclosed inside [], but this form is
       not required here.

       When inet_interfaces specifies just one IPv4 and/or IPv6  address  that
       is  not  a  loopback  address,  the  Postfix  SMTP client will use this
       address as the IP source address for outbound mail. Support for IPv6 is
       available in Postfix version 2.2 and later.

       On  a multi-homed firewall with separate Postfix instances listening on
       the "inside" and "outside" interfaces, this can prevent  each  instance
       from  being  able to reach servers on the "other side" of the firewall.
       Setting smtp_bind_address to 0.0.0.0 avoids the potential  problem  for
       IPv4, and setting smtp_bind_address6 to :: solves the problem for IPv6.

       A better solution for multi-homed firewalls is to leave inet_interfaces
       at  the default value and instead use explicit IP addresses in the mas-
       ter.cf SMTP  server  definitions.   This  preserves  the  Postfix  SMTP
       client's  loop  detection,  by  ensuring that each side of the firewall
       knows that the other  IP  address  is  still  the  same  host.  Setting
       $inet_interfaces to a single IPv4 and/or IPV6 address is primarily use-
       ful with virtual hosting of domains on  secondary  IP  addresses,  when
       each IP address serves a different domain (and has a different $myhost-
       name setting).

       See also the proxy_interfaces parameter, for network addresses that are
       forwarded to Postfix by way of a proxy or address translator.

       Examples:

       inet_interfaces = all (DEFAULT)
       inet_interfaces = loopback-only (Postfix version 2.2 and later)
       inet_interfaces = 127.0.0.1
       inet_interfaces = 127.0.0.1, [::1] (Postfix version 2.2 and later)
       inet_interfaces = 192.168.1.2, 127.0.0.1

inet_protocols (default: ipv4)
       The  Internet  protocols  Postfix  will  attempt  to use when making or
       accepting connections. Specify one or more of "ipv4" or  "ipv6",  sepa-
       rated  by  whitespace or commas. The form "all" is equivalent to "ipv4,
       ipv6" or "ipv4", depending on whether the operating  system  implements
       IPv6.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

       Note: you MUST stop and start Postfix after changing this parameter.

       On systems that pre-date IPV6_V6ONLY support (RFC 3493), an IPv6 server
       will also accept IPv4 connections, even when IPv4 is  turned  off  with
       the  inet_protocols  parameter.   On  systems with IPV6_V6ONLY support,
       Postfix will use separate server sockets for IPv6 and  IPv4,  and  each
       will accept only connections for the corresponding protocol.

       When  IPv4 support is enabled via the inet_protocols parameter, Postfix
       will to DNS type A record lookups, and will convert IPv4-in-IPv6 client
       IP  addresses  (::ffff:1.2.3.4)  to their original IPv4 form (1.2.3.4).
       The latter is needed on hosts that pre-date  IPV6_V6ONLY  support  (RFC
       3493).

       When  IPv6 support is enabled via the inet_protocols parameter, Postfix
       will do DNS type AAAA record lookups.

       When both IPv4 and IPv6 support are enabled, the  Postfix  SMTP  client
       will attempt to connect via IPv6 before attempting to use IPv4.

       Examples:

       inet_protocols = ipv4 (DEFAULT)
       inet_protocols = all
       inet_protocols = ipv6
       inet_protocols = ipv4, ipv6

initial_destination_concurrency (default: 5)
       The  initial per-destination concurrency level for parallel delivery to
       the same destination.  With per-destination recipient limit > 1, a des-
       tination is a domain, otherwise it is a recipient.

       Use  transport_initial_destination_concurrency  to specify a transport-
       specific override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message
       delivery transport (Postfix 2.5 and later).

       Warning:  with concurrency of 1, one bad message can be enough to block
       all mail to a site.

internal_mail_filter_classes (default: empty)
       What categories of Postfix-generated mail are subject  to  before-queue
       content inspection by non_smtpd_milters, header_checks and body_checks.
       Specify zero or more of  the  following,  separated  by  whitespace  or
       comma.

       bounce Inspect the content of delivery status notifications.

       notify Inspect  the  content of postmaster notifications by the smtp(8)
              and smtpd(8) processes.

       NOTE: It's generally not safe to enable content inspection of  Postfix-
       generated email messages. The user is warned.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

invalid_hostname_reject_code (default: 501)
       The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when the client HELO or
       EHLO command parameter is rejected by the  reject_invalid_helo_hostname
       restriction.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

ipc_idle (default: version dependent)
       The time after which a client closes  an  idle  internal  communication
       channel.   The  purpose  is  to  allow servers to terminate voluntarily
       after they become idle. This is  used,  for  example,  by  the  address
       resolving and rewriting clients.

       With Postfix 2.4 the default value was reduced from 100s to 5s.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

ipc_timeout (default: 3600s)
       The time limit for sending or receiving information  over  an  internal
       communication  channel.  The purpose is to break out of deadlock situa-
       tions. If the time limit is exceeded the software aborts with  a  fatal
       error.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

ipc_ttl (default: 1000s)
       The time after which a client closes an active  internal  communication
       channel.   The  purpose  is  to  allow servers to terminate voluntarily
       after reaching their client limit.  This is used, for example,  by  the
       address resolving and rewriting clients.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

line_length_limit (default: 2048)
       Upon input, long lines are chopped up  into  pieces  of  at  most  this
       length; upon delivery, long lines are reconstructed.

lmtp_bind_address (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_bind_address configuration param-
       eter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_bind_address6 (default: empty)
       The  LMTP-specific  version  of  the  smtp_bind_address6  configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_cache_connection (default: yes)
       Keep  Postfix LMTP client connections open for up to $max_idle seconds.
       When the LMTP client receives a request for  the  same  connection  the
       connection is reused.

       The  effectiveness of cached connections will be determined by the num-
       ber of LMTP servers in use, and the concurrency limit specified for the
       LMTP  client.  Cached connections are closed under any of the following
       conditions:

       o      The LMTP client idle time limit is reached.  This limit is spec-
              ified with the Postfix max_idle configuration parameter.

       o      A  delivery  request  specifies a different destination than the
              one currently cached.

       o      The per-process limit on the  number  of  delivery  requests  is
              reached.   This limit is specified with the Postfix max_use con-
              figuration parameter.

       o      Upon the onset of another  delivery  request,  the  LMTP  server
              associated with the current session does not respond to the RSET
              command.

       Most of these limitations will be removed after  Postfix  implements  a
       connection cache that is shared among multiple LMTP client programs.

lmtp_cname_overrides_servername (default: yes)
       The  LMTP-specific  version of the smtp_cname_overrides_servername con-
       figuration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_connect_timeout (default: 0s)
       The LMTP client time limit for completing a  TCP  connection,  or  zero
       (use the operating system built-in time limit).  When no connection can
       be made within the deadline, the LMTP client tries the next address  on
       the mail exchanger list.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

       Example:

       lmtp_connect_timeout = 30s

lmtp_connection_cache_destinations (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific  version  of  the  smtp_connection_cache_destinations
       configuration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_connection_cache_on_demand (default: yes)
       The  LMTP-specific  version of the smtp_connection_cache_on_demand con-
       figuration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_connection_cache_time_limit (default: 2s)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_connection_cache_time_limit  con-
       figuration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_connection_reuse_time_limit (default: 300s)
       The  LMTP-specific version of the smtp_connection_reuse_time_limit con-
       figuration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_data_done_timeout (default: 600s)
       The LMTP client time limit for sending the LMTP ".", and for  receiving
       the server response.  When no response is received within the deadline,
       a warning is logged that the mail may be delivered multiple times.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

lmtp_data_init_timeout (default: 120s)
       The  LMTP  client time limit for sending the LMTP DATA command, and for
       receiving the server response.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

lmtp_data_xfer_timeout (default: 180s)
       The  LMTP client time limit for sending the LMTP message content.  When
       the connection stalls for more than  $lmtp_data_xfer_timeout  the  LMTP
       client terminates the transfer.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

lmtp_defer_if_no_mx_address_found (default: no)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_defer_if_no_mx_address_found con-
       figuration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_destination_concurrency_limit    (default:   $default_destination_concur-
       rency_limit)
       The maximal number of parallel deliveries to the same  destination  via
       the  lmtp  message  delivery  transport.  This limit is enforced by the
       queue manager. The message delivery transport name is the  first  field
       in the entry in the master.cf file.

lmtp_destination_recipient_limit     (default:    $default_destination_recipi-
       ent_limit)
       The maximal number of recipients per  delivery  via  the  lmtp  message
       delivery  transport.  This  limit is enforced by the queue manager. The
       message delivery transport name is the first field in the entry in  the
       master.cf file.

       Setting this parameter to a value of 1 changes the meaning of lmtp_des-
       tination_concurrency_limit from concurrency per domain into concurrency
       per recipient.

lmtp_discard_lhlo_keyword_address_maps (default: empty)
       Lookup  tables,  indexed  by  the remote LMTP server address, with case
       insensitive lists of LHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls,  auth,  etc.)
       that  the  LMTP  client  will ignore in the LHLO response from a remote
       LMTP server. See lmtp_discard_lhlo_keywords for details. The  table  is
       not  indexed  by  hostname for consistency with smtpd_discard_ehlo_key-
       word_address_maps.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_discard_lhlo_keywords (default: empty)
       A case insensitive list of LHLO keywords (pipelining,  starttls,  auth,
       etc.)  that  the  LMTP  client  will ignore in the LHLO response from a
       remote LMTP server.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

       Notes:

       o      Specify the silent-discard pseudo keyword to prevent this action
              from being logged.

       o      Use  the  lmtp_discard_lhlo_keyword_address_maps feature to dis-
              card LHLO keywords selectively.

lmtp_enforce_tls (default: no)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_enforce_tls configuration parame-
       ter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_generic_maps (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_generic_maps configuration param-
       eter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_host_lookup (default: dns)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_host_lookup configuration parame-
       ter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_lhlo_name (default: $myhostname)
       The hostname to send in the LMTP LHLO command.

       The  default  value  is  the  machine  hostname.  Specify a hostname or
       [ip.add.re.ss].

       This information can be specified in the  main.cf  file  for  all  LMTP
       clients,  or  it  can be specified in the master.cf file for a specific
       client, for example:

           /etc/postfix/master.cf:
               mylmtp ... lmtp -o lmtp_lhlo_name=foo.bar.com

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_lhlo_timeout (default: 300s)
       The LMTP client time limit  for  sending  the  LHLO  command,  and  for
       receiving the initial server response.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

lmtp_line_length_limit (default: 990)
       The LMTP-specific version of the  smtp_line_length_limit  configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_mail_timeout (default: 300s)
       The  LMTP  client time limit for sending the MAIL FROM command, and for
       receiving the server response.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

lmtp_mx_address_limit (default: 5)
       The  LMTP-specific  version  of the smtp_mx_address_limit configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_mx_session_limit (default: 2)
       The LMTP-specific version of  the  smtp_mx_session_limit  configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_pix_workaround_delay_time (default: 10s)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_pix_workaround_delay_time config-
       uration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_pix_workaround_maps (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_pix_workaround_maps configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

lmtp_pix_workaround_threshold_time (default: 500s)
       The  LMTP-specific  version  of  the smtp_pix_workaround_threshold_time
       configuration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_pix_workarounds (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific  version  of  the  smtp_pix_workaround  configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

lmtp_quit_timeout (default: 300s)
       The  LMTP  client  time  limit  for  sending  the QUIT command, and for
       receiving the server response.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

lmtp_quote_rfc821_envelope (default: yes)
       The  LMTP-specific version of the smtp_quote_rfc821_envelope configura-
       tion parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_randomize_addresses (default: yes)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_randomize_addresses configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_rcpt_timeout (default: 300s)
       The  LMTP  client  time  limit for sending the RCPT TO command, and for
       receiving the server response.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

lmtp_rset_timeout (default: 20s)
       The  LMTP  client  time  limit  for  sending  the RSET command, and for
       receiving the server response. The LMTP client sends RSET in  order  to
       finish a recipient address probe, or to verify that a cached connection
       is still alive.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

lmtp_sasl_auth_cache_name (default: empty)
       The  LMTP-specific  version of the smtp_sasl_auth_cache_name configura-
       tion parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_sasl_auth_cache_time (default: 90d)
       The LMTP-specific version of the  smtp_sasl_auth_cache_time  configura-
       tion parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_sasl_auth_enable (default: no)
       Enable SASL authentication in the Postfix LMTP client.

lmtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce (default: yes)
       The  LMTP-specific version of the smtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce configura-
       tion parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_sasl_mechanism_filter (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_sasl_mechanism_filter  configura-
       tion parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_sasl_password_maps (default: empty)
       Optional LMTP client lookup tables with one username:password entry per
       host or domain.  If a remote host or domain  has  no  username:password
       entry, then the Postfix LMTP client will not attempt to authenticate to
       the remote host.

lmtp_sasl_path (default: empty)
       Implementation-specific information that is passed through to the  SASL
       plug-in implementation that is selected with lmtp_sasl_type.  Typically
       this specifies the name of a configuration file or rendezvous point.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_sasl_security_options (default: noplaintext, noanonymous)
       SASL security options; as of Postfix 2.3 the list of available features
       depends  on  the  SASL  client  implementation  that  is  selected with
       lmtp_sasl_type.

       The following security features are defined for the cyrus  client  SASL
       implementation:

       noplaintext
              Disallow authentication methods that use plaintext passwords.

       noactive
              Disallow  authentication methods that are vulnerable to non-dic-
              tionary active attacks.

       nodictionary
              Disallow authentication methods that are vulnerable  to  passive
              dictionary attack.

       noanonymous
              Disallow anonymous logins.

       Example:

       lmtp_sasl_security_options = noplaintext

lmtp_sasl_tls_security_options (default: $lmtp_sasl_security_options)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_sasl_tls_security_options config-
       uration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_sasl_tls_verified_security_options     (default:     $lmtp_sasl_tls_secu-
       rity_options)
       The   LMTP-specific   version   of   the   smtp_sasl_tls_verified_secu-
       rity_options configuration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_sasl_type (default: cyrus)
       The SASL plug-in type that the  Postfix  LMTP  client  should  use  for
       authentication.   The available types are listed with the "postconf -A"
       command.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_send_xforward_command (default: no)
       Send an XFORWARD command to the LMTP server when the LMTP  LHLO  server
       response  announces  XFORWARD support.  This allows an lmtp(8) delivery
       agent, used for content filter message injection, to forward the  name,
       address,  protocol  and HELO name of the original client to the content
       filter and downstream queuing LMTP server.  Before you change the value
       to  yes, it is best to make sure that your content filter supports this
       command.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

lmtp_sender_dependent_authentication (default: no)
       The LMTP-specific version of  the  smtp_sender_dependent_authentication
       configuration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_skip_5xx_greeting (default: yes)
       The  LMTP-specific  version of the smtp_skip_5xx_greeting configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_skip_quit_response (default: no)
       Wait for the response to the LMTP QUIT command.

lmtp_starttls_timeout (default: 300s)
       The LMTP-specific version of  the  smtp_starttls_timeout  configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tcp_port (default: 24)
       The default TCP port that the Postfix LMTP client connects to.

lmtp_tls_CAfile (default: empty)
       The  LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_CAfile configuration parame-
       ter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_CApath (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_CApath configuration  parame-
       ter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_cert_file (default: empty)
       The  LMTP-specific  version  of  the  smtp_tls_cert_file  configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_dcert_file (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific  version  of  the  smtp_tls_dcert_file  configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_dkey_file (default: $lmtp_tls_dcert_file)
       The  LMTP-specific  version  of  the  smtp_tls_dkey_file  configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_enforce_peername (default: yes)
       The LMTP-specific version of the  smtp_tls_enforce_peername  configura-
       tion parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific version of the  smtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match  con-
       figuration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_tls_fingerprint_digest (default: md5)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest configura-
       tion parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_tls_key_file (default: $lmtp_tls_cert_file)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_key_file configuration param-
       eter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_loglevel (default: 0)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_loglevel configuration param-
       eter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers  configura-
       tion parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
       The  LMTP-specific  version  of  the smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers
       configuration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_mandatory_protocols (default: SSLv3, TLSv1)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols  configu-
       ration parameter. See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_note_starttls_offer (default: no)
       The  LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_note_starttls_offer configu-
       ration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_per_site (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_per_site configuration param-
       eter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_policy_maps (default: empty)
       The  LMTP-specific  version  of  the smtp_tls_policy_maps configuration
       parameter. See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_scert_verifydepth (default: 9)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_scert_verifydepth  configura-
       tion parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_secure_cert_match (default: nexthop)
       The  LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_secure_cert_match configura-
       tion parameter. See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_security_level (default: empty)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_security_level  configuration
       parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_session_cache_database (default: empty)
       The  LMTP-specific  version of the smtp_tls_session_cache_database con-
       figuration parameter. See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_session_cache_timeout (default: 3600s)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_session_cache_timeout config-
       uration parameter.  See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_verify_cert_match (default: hostname)
       The  LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_verify_cert_match configura-
       tion parameter. See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_use_tls (default: no)
       The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_use_tls configuration  parameter.
       See there for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_xforward_timeout (default: 300s)
       The  LMTP  client  time limit for sending the XFORWARD command, and for
       receiving the server response.

       In case of problems the client does NOT try the  next  address  on  the
       mail exchanger list.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

local_command_shell (default: empty)
       Optional shell program for local(8) delivery  to  non-Postfix  command.
       By  default,  non-Postfix  commands are executed directly; commands are
       given to given to /bin/sh only when they contain shell meta  characters
       or shell built-in commands.

       "sendmail's  restricted  shell" (smrsh) is what most people will use in
       order to restrict what programs can be run  from  e.g.  .forward  files
       (smrsh is part of the Sendmail distribution).

       Note:  when  a  shell program is specified, it is invoked even when the
       command contains no shell built-in commands or meta characters.

       Example:

       local_command_shell = /some/where/smrsh -c

local_destination_concurrency_limit (default: 2)
       The maximal number of parallel deliveries via the local  mail  delivery
       transport   to  the  same  recipient  (when  "local_destination_recipi-
       ent_limit = 1") or the maximal number of  parallel  deliveries  to  the
       same  local domain (when "local_destination_recipient_limit > 1"). This
       limit is enforced by the queue manager. The message delivery  transport
       name is the first field in the entry in the master.cf file.

       A  low limit of 2 is recommended, just in case someone has an expensive
       shell command in a .forward file or in an alias (e.g., a  mailing  list
       manager).  You don't want to run lots of those at the same time.

local_destination_recipient_limit (default: 1)
       The  maximal  number  of  recipients per message delivery via the local
       mail delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the  queue  manager.
       The  message delivery transport name is the first field in the entry in
       the master.cf file.

       Setting this parameter to a value > 1 changes the meaning of local_des-
       tination_concurrency_limit  from concurrency per recipient into concur-
       rency per domain.

local_header_rewrite_clients (default: permit_inet_interfaces)
       Rewrite message header addresses in mail from these clients and  update
       incomplete  addresses  with  the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain;
       either don't rewrite message headers from other clients at all, or  re-
       write  message  headers and update incomplete addresses with the domain
       specified in the remote_header_rewrite_domain parameter.

       See  the  append_at_myorigin  and  append_dot_mydomain  parameters  for
       details of how domain names are appended to incomplete addresses.

       Specify a list of zero or more of the following:

       permit_inet_interfaces
              Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the client
              IP address matches $inet_interfaces. This is enabled by default.

       permit_mynetworks
              Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the client
              IP address matches any network  or  network  address  listed  in
              $mynetworks.  This  setting  will not prevent remote mail header
              address rewriting when mail from a remote client is forwarded by
              a neighboring system.

       permit_sasl_authenticated
              Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the client
              is successfully authenticated via the RFC 4954 (AUTH)  protocol.

       permit_tls_clientcerts
              Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the client
              TLS certificate fingerprint  is  listed  in  $relay_clientcerts.
              The   fingerprint  digest  algorithm  is  configurable  via  the
              smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest parameter (hard-coded as md5  prior
              to Postfix version 2.5).

       permit_tls_all_clientcerts
              Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the client
              TLS certificate is successfully verified, regardless of  whether
              it  is  listed  on  the server, and regardless of the certifying
              authority.

       check_address_map type:table

       type:table
              Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the client
              IP  address  matches  the  specified  lookup  table.  The lookup
              result is ignored, and no subnet lookup is done. This  is  suit-
              able for, e.g., pop-before-smtp lookup tables.

       Examples:

       The  Postfix < 2.2 backwards compatible setting: always rewrite message
       headers,  and  always  append  my  own  domain  to  incomplete   header
       addresses.

           local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all

       The  purist  (and  default)  setting: rewrite headers only in mail from
       Postfix sendmail and in SMTP mail from this machine.

           local_header_rewrite_clients = permit_inet_interfaces

       The intermediate setting: rewrite header addresses and append $myorigin
       or  $mydomain  information  only  with mail from Postfix sendmail, from
       local clients, or from authorized SMTP clients.

       Note: this setting will not prevent remote mail header address  rewrit-
       ing  when  mail from a remote client is forwarded by a neighboring sys-
       tem.

           local_header_rewrite_clients = permit_mynetworks,
               permit_sasl_authenticated permit_tls_clientcerts
               check_address_map hash:/etc/postfix/pop-before-smtp

local_recipient_maps (default: proxy:unix:passwd.byname $alias_maps)
       Lookup tables with all names or addresses of local recipients: a recip-
       ient   address   is  local  when  its  domain  matches  $mydestination,
       $inet_interfaces or $proxy_interfaces.  Specify @domain as a  wild-card
       for  domains  that  do  not  have a valid recipient list.  Technically,
       tables listed with $local_recipient_maps are  used  as  lists:  Postfix
       needs  to know only if a lookup string is found or not, but it does not
       use the result from table lookup.

       If this parameter is non-empty (the default),  then  the  Postfix  SMTP
       server will reject mail for unknown local users.

       To  turn off local recipient checking in the Postfix SMTP server, spec-
       ify "local_recipient_maps =" (i.e. empty).

       The default setting assumes that you  use  the  default  Postfix  local
       delivery agent for local delivery. You need to update the local_recipi-
       ent_maps setting if:

       o      You redefine the local delivery agent in master.cf.

       o      You redefine the "local_transport" setting in main.cf.

       o      You  use  the  "luser_relay",  "mailbox_transport",  or   "fall-
              back_transport"  feature of the Postfix local(8) delivery agent.

       Details are described in the LOCAL_RECIPIENT_README file.

       Beware: if the Postfix SMTP server runs chrooted, you  need  to  access
       the  passwd  file  via  the  proxymap(8)  service, in order to overcome
       chroot access restrictions. The alternative, maintaining a copy of  the
       system password file in the chroot jail is not practical.

       Examples:

       local_recipient_maps =

local_transport (default: local:$myhostname)
       The  default mail delivery transport and next-hop destination for final
       delivery to domains listed with mydestination, and for [ipaddress] des-
       tinations  that  match  $inet_interfaces  or  $proxy_interfaces.   This
       information can be overruled with the transport(5) table.

       By default, local mail is delivered to the  transport  called  "local",
       which is just the name of a service that is defined the master.cf file.

       Specify a string of the form transport:nexthop, where transport is  the
       name  of  a mail delivery transport defined in master.cf.  The :nexthop
       part is optional.  For more details see the transport(5) manual page.

       Beware: if you override the default local delivery agent then you  need
       to  review  the  LOCAL_RECIPIENT_README  document,  otherwise  the SMTP
       server may reject mail for local recipients.

luser_relay (default: empty)
       Optional catch-all destination for  unknown  local(8)  recipients.   By
       default,  mail for unknown recipients in domains that match $mydestina-
       tion, $inet_interfaces or $proxy_interfaces is returned  as  undeliver-
       able.

       The following $name expansions are done on luser_relay:

       $domain
              The recipient domain.

       $extension
              The recipient address extension.

       $home  The recipient's home directory.

       $local The entire recipient address localpart.

       $recipient
              The full recipient address.

       $recipient_delimiter
              The system-wide recipient address extension delimiter.

       $shell The recipient's login shell.

       $user  The recipient username.

       ${name?value}
              Expands to value when $name has a non-empty value.

       ${name:value}
              Expands to value when $name has an empty value.

       Instead of $name you can also specify ${name} or $(name).

       Note: luser_relay works only for the Postfix local(8) delivery agent.

       Note:  if  you  use  this feature for accounts not in the UNIX password
       file, then you must specify "local_recipient_maps ="  (i.e.  empty)  in
       the  main.cf  file,  otherwise the Postfix SMTP server will reject mail
       for non-UNIX accounts with "User unknown in local recipient table".

       Examples:

       luser_relay = $user@other.host
       luser_relay = $local@other.host
       luser_relay = admin+$local

mail_name (default: Postfix)
       The mail system name that is displayed in  Received:  headers,  in  the
       SMTP greeting banner, and in bounced mail.

mail_owner (default: postfix)
       The  UNIX  system  account that owns the Postfix queue and most Postfix
       daemon processes.  Specify the name of a user  account  that  does  not
       share  a group with other accounts and that owns no other files or pro-
       cesses on the system.  In particular, don't specify nobody  or  daemon.
       PLEASE USE A DEDICATED USER ID AND GROUP ID.

       When  this  parameter value is changed you need to re-run "postfix set-
       permissions" (with Postfix version 2.0 and earlier: "/etc/postfix/post-
       install set-permissions".

mail_release_date (default: see postconf -d output)
       The Postfix release date, in "YYYYMMDD" format.

mail_spool_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
       The directory where local(8) UNIX-style mailboxes are kept. The default
       setting depends on the system type. Specify a  name  ending  in  /  for
       maildir-style delivery.

       Note:  maildir  delivery  is done with the privileges of the recipient.
       If you use the mail_spool_directory setting for maildir style delivery,
       then  you must create the top-level maildir directory in advance. Post-
       fix will not create it.

       Examples:

       mail_spool_directory = /var/mail
       mail_spool_directory = /var/spool/mail

mail_version (default: see postconf -d output)
       The  version  of  the  mail   system.   Stable   releases   are   named
       major.minor.patchlevel.  Experimental releases also include the release
       date. The version string can be used in, for example, the SMTP greeting
       banner.

mailbox_command (default: empty)
       Optional  external  command that the local(8) delivery agent should use
       for mailbox delivery.  The command is run with the user ID and the pri-
       mary group ID privileges of the recipient.  Exception: command delivery
       for root executes with $default_privs privileges.  This is not a  prob-
       lem,  because  1) mail for root should always be aliased to a real user
       and 2) don't log in as root, use "su" instead.

       The following environment variables are exported to the command:

       CLIENT_ADDRESS
              Remote client network address. Available in Postfix version  2.2
              and later.

       CLIENT_HELO
              Remote  client EHLO command parameter. Available in Postfix ver-
              sion 2.2 and later.

       CLIENT_HOSTNAME
              Remote client hostname. Available in  Postfix  version  2.2  and
              later.

       CLIENT_PROTOCOL
              Remote  client  protocol.  Available  in Postfix version 2.2 and
              later.

       DOMAIN The domain part of the recipient address.

       EXTENSION
              The optional address extension.

       HOME   The recipient home directory.

       LOCAL  The recipient address localpart.

       LOGNAME
              The recipient's username.

       ORIGINAL_RECIPIENT
              The entire recipient address, before any  address  rewriting  or
              aliasing.

       RECIPIENT
              The full recipient address.

       SASL_METHOD
              SASL  authentication  method specified in the remote client AUTH
              command. Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later.

       SASL_SENDER
              SASL sender address specified in the  remote  client  MAIL  FROM
              command. Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later.

       SASL_USER
              SASL  username  specified  in  the  remote  client AUTH command.
              Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later.

       SENDER The full sender address.

       SHELL  The recipient's login shell.

       USER   The recipient username.

       Unlike other  Postfix  configuration  parameters,  the  mailbox_command
       parameter  is  not subjected to $name substitutions. This is to make it
       easier to specify shell syntax (see example below).

       If you can, avoid shell meta characters because they will force Postfix
       to  run  an  expensive shell process. If you're delivering via Procmail
       then running a shell won't make a noticeable difference  in  the  total
       cost.

       Note:  if  you  use the mailbox_command feature to deliver mail system-
       wide, you must set up an alias that forwards mail for root  to  a  real
       user.

       The  precedence  of  local(8)  delivery  features  from high to low is:
       aliases,  .forward  files,  mailbox_transport_maps,  mailbox_transport,
       mailbox_command_maps,  mailbox_command, home_mailbox, mail_spool_direc-
       tory, fallback_transport_maps, fallback_transport and luser_relay.

       Examples:

       mailbox_command = /some/where/procmail
       mailbox_command = /some/where/procmail -a "$EXTENSION"
       mailbox_command = /some/where/maildrop -d "$USER"
               -f "$SENDER" "$EXTENSION"

mailbox_command_maps (default: empty)
       Optional lookup tables with per-recipient external commands to use  for
       local(8) mailbox delivery.  Behavior is as with mailbox_command.

       The  precedence  of  local(8)  delivery  features  from high to low is:
       aliases,  .forward  files,  mailbox_transport_maps,  mailbox_transport,
       mailbox_command_maps,  mailbox_command, home_mailbox, mail_spool_direc-
       tory, fallback_transport_maps, fallback_transport and luser_relay.

mailbox_delivery_lock (default: see postconf -d output)
       How to lock a UNIX-style local(8) mailbox before  attempting  delivery.
       For  a  list  of  available file locking methods, use the "postconf -l"
       command.

       This setting is ignored  with  maildir  style  delivery,  because  such
       deliveries are safe without explicit locks.

       Note:  The  dotlock  method  requires that the recipient UID or GID has
       write access to the parent directory of the mailbox file.

       Note: the default setting of this parameter is system dependent.

mailbox_size_limit (default: 51200000)
       The maximal size of any local(8) individual mailbox or maildir file, or
       zero  (no  limit).   In  fact, this limits the size of any file that is
       written to upon local delivery, including  files  written  by  external
       commands that are executed by the local(8) delivery agent.

       This limit must not be smaller than the message size limit.

mailbox_transport (default: empty)
       Optional  message  delivery  transport that the local(8) delivery agent
       should use for mailbox delivery to all local recipients, whether or not
       they are found in the UNIX passwd database.

       The  precedence  of  local(8)  delivery  features  from high to low is:
       aliases,  .forward  files,  mailbox_transport_maps,  mailbox_transport,
       mailbox_command_maps,  mailbox_command, home_mailbox, mail_spool_direc-
       tory, fallback_transport_maps, fallback_transport and luser_relay.

mailbox_transport_maps (default: empty)
       Optional lookup tables with per-recipient message  delivery  transports
       to use for local(8) mailbox delivery, whether or not the recipients are
       found in the UNIX passwd database.

       The precedence of local(8) delivery  features  from  high  to  low  is:
       aliases,  .forward  files,  mailbox_transport_maps,  mailbox_transport,
       mailbox_command_maps, mailbox_command, home_mailbox,  mail_spool_direc-
       tory, fallback_transport_maps, fallback_transport and luser_relay.

       For  safety  reasons, this feature does not allow $number substitutions
       in regular expression maps.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

mailq_path (default: see postconf -d output)
       Sendmail  compatibility  feature  that  specifies  where  the   Postfix
       mailq(1)  command  is  installed.  This command can be used to list the
       Postfix mail queue.

manpage_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
       Where the Postfix manual pages are installed.

maps_rbl_domains (default: empty)
       Obsolete feature: use the reject_rbl_client feature instead.

maps_rbl_reject_code (default: 554)
       The numerical Postfix SMTP server response  code  when  a  remote  SMTP
       client     request     is    blocked    by    the    reject_rbl_client,
       reject_rhsbl_client,  reject_rhsbl_sender   or   reject_rhsbl_recipient
       restriction.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

masquerade_classes (default: envelope_sender, header_sender, header_recipient)

       What addresses are subject to address masquerading.

       By   default,  address  masquerading  is  limited  to  envelope  sender
       addresses, and to header sender and header recipient  addresses.   This
       allows  you  to  use address masquerading on a mail gateway while still
       being able to forward mail to users on individual machines.

       Specify  zero  or   more   of:   envelope_sender,   envelope_recipient,
       header_sender, header_recipient

masquerade_domains (default: empty)
       Optional list of domains whose subdomain structure will be stripped off
       in email addresses.

       The list is processed left to right, and processing stops at the  first
       match.  Thus,

           masquerade_domains = foo.example.com example.com

       strips  "user@any.thing.foo.example.com" to "user@foo.example.com", but
       strips "user@any.thing.else.example.com" to "user@example.com".

       A domain name prefixed with ! means do not masquerade  this  domain  or
       its subdomains. Thus,

           masquerade_domains = !foo.example.com example.com

       does  not  change  "user@any.thing.foo.example.com"  or "user@foo.exam-
       ple.com", but strips "user@any.thing.else.example.com"  to  "user@exam-
       ple.com".

       Note:  with  Postfix  version  2.2, message header address masquerading
       happens only when message header address rewriting is enabled:

       o      The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

       o      The message is received  from  a  network  client  that  matches
              $local_header_rewrite_clients,

       o      The   message   is   received   from   the   network,   and  the
              remote_header_rewrite_domain  parameter  specifies  a  non-empty
              value.

       To   get   the   behavior   before   Postfix   version   2.2,   specify
       "local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

       Example:

       masquerade_domains = $mydomain

masquerade_exceptions (default: empty)
       Optional list of user names that are  not  subjected  to  address  mas-
       querading, even when their address matches $masquerade_domains.

       By default, address masquerading makes no exceptions.

       Specify  a  list  of user names, "/file/name" or "type:table" patterns,
       separated by commas and/or whitespace. The  list  is  matched  left  to
       right,  and the search stops on the first match. A "/file/name" pattern
       is replaced by its contents; a "type:table"  lookup  table  is  matched
       when  a name matches a lookup key (the lookup result is ignored).  Con-
       tinue long lines by starting the next  line  with  whitespace.  Specify
       "!pattern"  to  exclude a name from the list. The form "!/file/name" is
       supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

       Examples:

       masquerade_exceptions = root, mailer-daemon
       masquerade_exceptions = root

max_idle (default: 100s)
       The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix  daemon  process  waits
       for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.  This param-
       eter is ignored by the Postfix queue manager and  by  other  long-lived
       Postfix daemon processes.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

max_use (default: 100)
       The maximal number  of  incoming  connections  that  a  Postfix  daemon
       process will service before terminating voluntarily.  This parameter is
       ignored by the Postfix queue manager and by  other  long-lived  Postfix
       daemon processes.

maximal_backoff_time (default: 4000s)
       The maximal time between attempts to deliver a deferred message.

       This parameter should be set to a value greater than or equal to $mini-
       mal_backoff_time. See also $queue_run_delay.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

maximal_queue_lifetime (default: 5d)
       The maximal time a message is queued before it is sent back as undeliv-
       erable.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is d (days).

       Specify 0 when mail delivery should be tried only once.

message_reject_characters (default: empty)
       The set of characters that Postfix will reject in message content.  The
       usual C-like escape sequences are recognized: \a \b \f \n \r \t \v \ddd
       (up to three octal digits) and \\.

       Example:

       message_reject_characters = \0

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

message_size_limit (default: 10240000)
       The maximal size in bytes of a message, including envelope information.

message_strip_characters (default: empty)
       The set of characters that Postfix will remove  from  message  content.
       The  usual C-like escape sequences are recognized: \a \b \f \n \r \t \v
       \ddd (up to three octal digits) and \\.

       Example:

       message_strip_characters = \0

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_command_timeout (default: 30s)
       The time limit for sending an SMTP command to a  Milter  (mail  filter)
       application, and for receiving the response.

       Specify  a non-zero time value (an integral value plus an optional one-
       letter suffix that specifies the time unit).

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_connect_macros (default: see postconf -n output)
       The  macros  that  are  sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after
       completion of an SMTP connection.  See  MILTER_README  for  a  list  of
       available macro names and their meanings.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_connect_timeout (default: 30s)
       The  time  limit  for connecting to a Milter (mail filter) application,
       and for negotiating protocol options.

       Specify a non-zero time value (an integral value plus an optional  one-
       letter suffix that specifies the time unit).

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_content_timeout (default: 300s)
       The time limit for sending message content to a  Milter  (mail  filter)
       application, and for receiving the response.

       Specify  a non-zero time value (an integral value plus an optional one-
       letter suffix that specifies the time unit).

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_data_macros (default: see postconf -n output)
       The  macros  that  are sent to version 4 or higher Milter (mail filter)
       applications after the SMTP DATA command. See MILTER_README for a  list
       of available macro names and their meanings.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_default_action (default: tempfail)
       The  default action when a Milter (mail filter) application is unavail-
       able or mis-configured. Specify one of the following:

       accept Proceed as if the mail filter was not present.

       reject Reject all further commands in this  session  with  a  permanent
              status code.

       tempfail
              Reject  all  further  commands  in this session with a temporary
              status code.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_end_of_data_macros (default: see postconf -n output)
       The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after the
       message  end-of-data.  See  MILTER_README for a list of available macro
       names and their meanings.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_end_of_header_macros (default: see postconf -n output)
       The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after the
       end  of  the  message header. See MILTER_README for a list of available
       macro names and their meanings.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

milter_helo_macros (default: see postconf -n output)
       The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after the
       SMTP  HELO  or  EHLO command. See MILTER_README for a list of available
       macro names and their meanings.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_macro_daemon_name (default: $myhostname)
       The {daemon_name} macro value for Milter  (mail  filter)  applications.
       See  MILTER_README  for a list of available macro names and their mean-
       ings.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_macro_v (default: $mail_name $mail_version)
       The {v} macro value for Milter (mail filter)  applications.   See  MIL-
       TER_README for a list of available macro names and their meanings.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_mail_macros (default: see postconf -n output)
       The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after the
       SMTP MAIL FROM command. See MILTER_README for a list of available macro
       names and their meanings.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_protocol (default: 2)
       The  mail  filter protocol version and optional protocol extensions for
       communication with a Milter (mail filter)  application.  Postfix  sends
       this  version  number during the initial protocol handshake.  It should
       match the version number that is expected by the mail  filter  applica-
       tion (or by its Milter library).

       Protocol versions:

       2      Use  Sendmail  8  mail  filter protocol version 2 (default as of
              Sendmail version 8.11).

       3      Use Sendmail 8 mail filter protocol version 3.

       4      Use Sendmail 8 mail filter protocol version 4.

       6      Use Sendmail 8 mail filter protocol version  6  (default  as  of
              Sendmail version 8.14).

       Protocol extensions:

       no_header_reply
              Specify this when the Milter application will not reply for each
              individual message header.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_rcpt_macros (default: see postconf -n output)
       The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after the
       SMTP  RCPT  TO command. See MILTER_README for a list of available macro
       names and their meanings.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_unknown_command_macros (default: see postconf -n output)
       The macros that are sent to version 3 or higher  Milter  (mail  filter)
       applications  after  an  unknown SMTP command.  See MILTER_README for a
       list of available macro names and their meanings.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

mime_boundary_length_limit (default: 2048)
       The maximal length of MIME multipart boundary strings. The MIME proces-
       sor  is unable to distinguish between boundary strings that do not dif-
       fer in the first $mime_boundary_length_limit characters.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

mime_header_checks (default: $header_checks)
       Optional lookup tables for content inspection of MIME  related  message
       headers, as described in the header_checks(5) manual page.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

mime_nesting_limit (default: 100)
       The maximal recursion level that the MIME processor will handle.  Post-
       fix refuses mail that is nested deeper than the specified limit.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

minimal_backoff_time (default: 300s)
       The minimal time between attempts to deliver a deferred message;  prior
       to Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.

       This  parameter also limits the time an unreachable destination is kept
       in the short-term, in-memory, destination status cache.

       This parameter should be set greater than or equal to $queue_run_delay.
       See also $maximal_backoff_time.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

multi_recipient_bounce_reject_code (default: 550)
       The numerical Postfix SMTP server response  code  when  a  remote  SMTP
       client request is blocked by the reject_multi_recipient_bounce restric-
       tion.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

mydestination (default: $myhostname, localhost.$mydomain, localhost)
       The  list  of  domains that are delivered via the $local_transport mail
       delivery transport. By default this is the  Postfix  local(8)  delivery
       agent  which  looks  up all recipients in /etc/passwd and /etc/aliases.
       The SMTP  server  validates  recipient  addresses  with  $local_recipi-
       ent_maps and rejects non-existent recipients. See also the local domain
       class in the ADDRESS_CLASS_README file.

       The default mydestination value specifies names for the  local  machine
       only.  On a mail domain gateway, you should also include $mydomain.

       The   $local_transport  delivery  method  is  also  selected  for  mail
       addressed to user@[the.net.work.address] of the  mail  system  (the  IP
       addresses  specified  with  the  inet_interfaces  and  proxy_interfaces
       parameters).

       Warnings:

       o      Do not specify the names of virtual domains - those domains  are
              specified elsewhere. See VIRTUAL_README for more information.

       o      Do  not specify the names of domains that this machine is backup
              MX host for. See STANDARD_CONFIGURATION_README for how to set up
              backup MX hosts.

       o      By  default, the Postfix SMTP server rejects mail for recipients
              not listed with the  local_recipient_maps  parameter.   See  the
              postconf(5) manual for a description of the local_recipient_maps
              and unknown_local_recipient_reject_code parameters.

       Specify a list of host or domain names,  "/file/name"  or  "type:table"
       patterns, separated by commas and/or whitespace. A "/file/name" pattern
       is replaced by its contents; a "type:table"  lookup  table  is  matched
       when  a name matches a lookup key (the lookup result is ignored).  Con-
       tinue long lines by starting the next line with whitespace.

       Examples:

       mydestination = $myhostname, localhost.$mydomain $mydomain
       mydestination = $myhostname, localhost.$mydomain www.$mydomain, ftp.$mydomain

mydomain (default: see postconf -d output)
       The internet domain name of this mail system.  The default  is  to  use
       $myhostname  minus the first component.  $mydomain is used as a default
       value for many other configuration parameters.

       Example:

       mydomain = domain.tld

myhostname (default: see postconf -d output)
       The internet hostname of this mail system. The default is  to  use  the
       fully-qualified  domain name from gethostname(). $myhostname is used as
       a default value for many other configuration parameters.

       Example:

       myhostname = host.domain.tld

mynetworks (default: see postconf -d output)
       The list of "trusted" SMTP  clients  that  have  more  privileges  than
       "strangers".

       In particular, "trusted" SMTP clients are allowed to relay mail through
       Postfix.  See the smtpd_recipient_restrictions parameter description in
       the postconf(5) manual.

       You  can specify the list of "trusted" network addresses by hand or you
       can let Postfix do it for you (which is the default).  See the descrip-
       tion of the mynetworks_style parameter for more information.

       If  you specify the mynetworks list by hand, Postfix ignores the mynet-
       works_style setting.

       Specify a list of network addresses or network/netmask patterns,  sepa-
       rated  by commas and/or whitespace. Continue long lines by starting the
       next line with whitespace.

       The netmask specifies the number of bits in the network part of a  host
       address.   You  can also specify "/file/name" or "type:table" patterns.
       A "/file/name" pattern is replaced  by  its  contents;  a  "type:table"
       lookup table is matched when a table entry matches a lookup string (the
       lookup result is ignored).

       The list is matched left to right, and the search stops  on  the  first
       match.   Specify "!pattern" to exclude an address or network block from
       the list. The form "!/file/name" is supported only in  Postfix  version
       2.4 and later.

       Note:  IP  version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
       the mynetworks value, and in files  specified  with  "/file/name".   IP
       version  6  addresses contain the ":" character, and would otherwise be
       confused with a "type:table" pattern.

       Examples:

       mynetworks = 127.0.0.0/8 168.100.189.0/28
       mynetworks = !192.168.0.1, 192.168.0.0/28
       mynetworks = 127.0.0.0/8 168.100.189.0/28 [::1]/128 [2001:240:587::]/64
       mynetworks = $config_directory/mynetworks
       mynetworks = hash:/etc/postfix/network_table

mynetworks_style (default: subnet)
       The method to generate the default value for the mynetworks  parameter.
       This is the list of trusted networks for relay access control etc.

       o      Specify  "mynetworks_style  =  host" when Postfix should "trust"
              only the local machine.

       o      Specify "mynetworks_style = subnet" when Postfix should  "trust"
              SMTP  clients  in  the same IP subnetworks as the local machine.
              On Linux, this works correctly only  with  interfaces  specified
              with the "ifconfig" command.

       o      Specify  "mynetworks_style  = class" when Postfix should "trust"
              SMTP clients in the same IP class A/B/C networks  as  the  local
              machine.   Don't  do  this  with  a dialup site - it would cause
              Postfix to "trust" your  entire  provider's  network.   Instead,
              specify  an  explicit mynetworks list by hand, as described with
              the mynetworks configuration parameter.

myorigin (default: $myhostname)
       The domain name that locally-posted mail appears to come from, and that
       locally  posted mail is delivered to. The default, $myhostname, is ade-
       quate for small sites.  If you run a domain with multiple machines, you
       should  (1) change this to $mydomain and (2) set up a domain-wide alias
       database that aliases each user to user@that.users.mailhost.

       Example:

       myorigin = $mydomain

nested_header_checks (default: $header_checks)
       Optional lookup tables for content inspection of non-MIME message head-
       ers  in  attached messages, as described in the header_checks(5) manual
       page.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

newaliases_path (default: see postconf -d output)
       Sendmail compatibility feature  that  specifies  the  location  of  the
       newaliases(1) command. This command can be used to rebuild the local(8)
       aliases(5) database.

non_fqdn_reject_code (default: 504)
       The numerical Postfix SMTP server reply code when a client  request  is
       rejected  by  the reject_non_fqdn_helo_hostname, reject_non_fqdn_sender
       or reject_non_fqdn_recipient restriction.

non_smtpd_milters (default: empty)
       A list of Milter (mail filter) applications for new mail that does  not
       arrive  via the Postfix smtpd(8) server. This includes local submission
       via the sendmail(1) command line, new mail that arrives via the Postfix
       qmqpd(8)  server,  and old mail that is re-injected into the queue with
       "postsuper -r".  See the MILTER_README document for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

notify_classes (default: resource, software)
       The list of error classes that are  reported  to  the  postmaster.  The
       default  is  to report only the most serious problems. The paranoid may
       wish to turn on the policy (UCE and mail relaying) and  protocol  error
       (broken mail software) reports.

       NOTE:  postmaster  notifications  may  contain confidential information
       such as SASL passwords or message content.  It is the  system  adminis-
       trator's responsibility to treat such information with care.

       The error classes are:

       bounce (also implies 2bounce)
              Send  the  postmaster copies of the headers of bounced mail, and
              send transcripts of SMTP sessions when Postfix rejects mail. The
              notification   is   sent  to  the  address  specified  with  the
              bounce_notice_recipient configuration parameter (default:  post-
              master).

       2bounce
              Send undeliverable bounced mail to the postmaster. The notifica-
              tion   is   sent   to   the   address   specified    with    the
              2bounce_notice_recipient configuration parameter (default: post-
              master).

       delay  Send the postmaster copies of the headers of delayed  mail.  The
              notification   is   sent  to  the  address  specified  with  the
              delay_notice_recipient configuration parameter  (default:  post-
              master).

       policy Send  the  postmaster  a  transcript  of the SMTP session when a
              client request was rejected because of (UCE) policy. The notifi-
              cation   is   sent   to   the   address   specified   with   the
              error_notice_recipient configuration parameter  (default:  post-
              master).

       protocol
              Send  the postmaster a transcript of the SMTP session in case of
              client or server protocol errors. The notification  is  sent  to
              the address specified with the error_notice_recipient configura-
              tion parameter (default: postmaster).

       resource
              Inform the postmaster of mail  not  delivered  due  to  resource
              problems.   The  notification  is  sent to the address specified
              with   the   error_notice_recipient   configuration    parameter
              (default: postmaster).

       software
              Inform  the  postmaster  of  mail  not delivered due to software
              problems.  The notification is sent  to  the  address  specified
              with    the   error_notice_recipient   configuration   parameter
              (default: postmaster).

       Examples:

       notify_classes = bounce, delay, policy, protocol, resource, software
       notify_classes = 2bounce, resource, software

owner_request_special (default: yes)
       Give special treatment to owner-listname and  listname-request  address
       localparts:  don't split such addresses when the recipient_delimiter is
       set to "-".  This feature is useful for mailing lists.

parent_domain_matches_subdomains (default: see postconf -d output)
       What Postfix features match subdomains of  "domain.tld"  automatically,
       instead  of  requiring  an  explicit  ".domain.tld"  pattern.   This is
       planned backwards compatibility:  eventually, all Postfix features  are
       expected  to  require  explicit  ".domain.tld"  style patterns when you
       really want to match subdomains.

permit_mx_backup_networks (default: empty)
       Restrict the use of the permit_mx_backup SMTP access  feature  to  only
       domains whose primary MX hosts match the listed networks.

pickup_service_name (default: pickup)
       The  name  of  the  pickup(8) service. This service picks up local mail
       submissions from the Postfix maildrop queue.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

plaintext_reject_code (default: 450)
       The numerical Postfix SMTP server  response  code  when  a  request  is
       rejected by the reject_plaintext_session restriction.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

prepend_delivered_header (default: command, file, forward)
       The message delivery contexts where the Postfix local(8) delivery agent
       prepends a Delivered-To:  message header with the address that the mail
       was  delivered  to.  This  information  is  used for mail delivery loop
       detection.

       By default, the Postfix local delivery agent prepends  a  Delivered-To:
       header  when  forwarding mail and when delivering to file (mailbox) and
       command. Turning off the Delivered-To: header when forwarding  mail  is
       not recommended.

       Specify zero or more of forward, file, or command.

       Example:

       prepend_delivered_header = forward

process_id (read-only)
       The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.

process_id_directory (default: pid)
       The  location  of Postfix PID files relative to $queue_directory.  This
       is a read-only parameter.

process_name (read-only)
       The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.

propagate_unmatched_extensions (default: canonical, virtual)
       What address lookup tables copy an address extension  from  the  lookup
       key to the lookup result.

       For example, with a virtual(5) mapping of "joe@domain -> joe.user", the
       address "joe+foo@domain" would rewrite to "joe.user+foo".

       Specify zero or more of canonical, virtual, alias, forward, include  or
       generic.  These  cause address extension propagation with canonical(5),
       virtual(5), and aliases(5) maps, with local(8) .forward  and  :include:
       file lookups, and with smtp(8) generic maps, respectively.

       Note:  enabling this feature for types other than canonical and virtual
       is likely to cause problems when mail  is  forwarded  to  other  sites,
       especially with mail that is sent to a mailing list exploder address.

       Examples:

       propagate_unmatched_extensions = canonical, virtual, alias,
               forward, include
       propagate_unmatched_extensions = canonical, virtual

proxy_interfaces (default: empty)
       The  network interface addresses that this mail system receives mail on
       by way of a proxy or network address translation unit.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

       You must specify your "outside" proxy/NAT addresses when your system is
       a  backup MX host for other domains, otherwise mail delivery loops will
       happen when the primary MX host is down.

       Example:

       proxy_interfaces = 1.2.3.4

proxy_read_maps (default: see postconf -d output)
       The lookup tables that the proxymap(8) server is allowed to access  for
       the  read-only  service.  Table references that don't begin with proxy:
       are ignored.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

proxy_write_maps (default: see postconf -d output)
       The lookup tables that the proxymap(8) server is allowed to access  for
       the  read-write  service.  Postfix-owned local database files should be
       stored under the Postfix-owned data_directory.  Table  references  that
       don't begin with proxy: are ignored.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

qmgr_clog_warn_time (default: 300s)
       The minimal delay between warnings that a specific destination is clog-
       ging up the Postfix active queue. Specify 0 to disable.

       This feature is enabled with the helpful_warnings parameter.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

qmgr_fudge_factor (default: 100)
       Obsolete feature: the percentage of delivery resources that a busy mail
       system will use up for delivery of a large mailing  list message.

       This feature exists only in the oqmgr(8) old queue manager. The current
       queue manager solves the problem in a better way.

qmgr_message_active_limit (default: 20000)
       The maximal number of messages in the active queue.

qmgr_message_recipient_limit (default: 20000)
       The maximal number of recipients held in memory by  the  Postfix  queue
       manager,  and the maximal size of the size of the short-term, in-memory
       "dead" destination status cache.

qmgr_message_recipient_minimum (default: 10)
       The minimal number of in-memory recipients for any message. This  takes
       priority  over  any  other in-memory recipient limits (i.e., the global
       qmgr_message_recipient_limit and the per transport _recipient_limit) if
       necessary. The minimum value allowed for this parameter is 1.

qmqpd_authorized_clients (default: empty)
       What clients are allowed to connect to the QMQP server port.

       By  default,  no  client is allowed to use the service. This is because
       the QMQP server will relay mail to any destination.

       Specify a list of client patterns. A  list  pattern  specifies  a  host
       name,  a  domain  name, an internet address, or a network/mask pattern,
       where the mask specifies the number of bits in the network part.   When
       a  pattern  specifies a file name, its contents are substituted for the
       file name; when a pattern is a "type:table" table specification,  table
       lookup is used instead.

       Patterns are separated by whitespace and/or commas. In order to reverse
       the result, precede a pattern with an exclamation point (!).  The  form
       "!/file/name" is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

       Example:

       qmqpd_authorized_clients = !192.168.0.1, 192.168.0.0/24

qmqpd_client_port_logging (default: no)
       Enable  logging of the remote QMQP client port in addition to the host-
       name and IP address. The logging format is "host[address]:port".

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

qmqpd_error_delay (default: 1s)
       How long the QMQP server will pause before sending a negative reply  to
       the  client. The purpose is to slow down confused or malicious clients.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

qmqpd_timeout (default: 300s)
       The  time  limit for sending or receiving information over the network.
       If a read or write operation blocks for more than  $qmqpd_timeout  sec-
       onds the QMQP server gives up and disconnects.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

queue_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
       The location of the Postfix top-level queue directory. This is the root
       directory of Postfix daemon processes that run chrooted.

queue_file_attribute_count_limit (default: 100)
       The  maximal  number of (name=value) attributes that may be stored in a
       Postfix queue file. The limit is enforced by the cleanup(8) server.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

queue_minfree (default: 0)
       The minimal amount of free space in bytes in the queue file system that
       is  needed  to receive mail.  This is currently used by the SMTP server
       to decide if it will accept any mail at all.

       By default, the Postfix version 2.1 SMTP server rejects MAIL FROM  com-
       mands   when   the   amount  of  free  space  is  less  than  1.5*$mes-
       sage_size_limit.  To specify a higher minimum free space limit, specify
       a queue_minfree value that is at least 1.5*$message_size_limit.

       With  Postfix  versions  2.0 and earlier, a queue_minfree value of zero
       means there is no minimum required amount of free space.

queue_run_delay (default: 300s)
       The time between deferred queue scans by the queue  manager;  prior  to
       Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.

       This  parameter  should  be  set  less  than or equal to $minimal_back-
       off_time. See also $maximal_backoff_time.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

queue_service_name (default: qmgr)
       The name of the qmgr(8) service. This service manages the Postfix queue
       and schedules delivery requests.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

rbl_reply_maps (default: empty)
       Optional lookup tables with RBL  response  templates.  The  tables  are
       indexed  by  the  RBL domain name. By default, Postfix uses the default
       template as specified with the default_rbl_reply configuration  parame-
       ter. See there for a discussion of the syntax of RBL reply templates.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

readme_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
       The  location  of Postfix README files that describe how to build, con-
       figure or operate a specific Postfix subsystem or feature.

receive_override_options (default: empty)
       Enable or disable recipient validation, built-in content filtering,  or
       address  mapping.  Typically,  these are specified in master.cf as com-
       mand-line arguments for the smtpd(8), qmqpd(8) or pickup(8) daemons.

       Specify zero or more of the following options.   The  options  override
       main.cf  settings  and are either implemented by smtpd(8), qmqpd(8), or
       pickup(8) themselves, or they are forwarded to the cleanup server.

       no_unknown_recipient_checks
              Do not try to reject  unknown  recipients  (SMTP  server  only).
              This is typically specified AFTER an external content filter.

       no_address_mappings
              Disable  canonical address mapping, virtual alias map expansion,
              address masquerading,  and  automatic  BCC  (blind  carbon-copy)
              recipients.  This is typically specified BEFORE an external con-
              tent filter.

       no_header_body_checks
              Disable header/body_checks. This is typically specified AFTER an
              external content filter.

       no_milters
              Disable  Milter  (mail  filter)  applications. This is typically
              specified AFTER an external content filter.

       Note: when the "BEFORE content filter" receive_override_options setting
       is  specified  in  the main.cf file, specify the "AFTER content filter"
       receive_override_options setting in master.cf (and vice versa).

       Examples:

       receive_override_options =
           no_unknown_recipient_checks, no_header_body_checks
       receive_override_options = no_address_mappings

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

recipient_bcc_maps (default: empty)
       Optional BCC (blind carbon-copy)  address  lookup  tables,  indexed  by
       recipient  address.   The  BCC  address  (multiple results are not sup-
       ported) is added when mail enters from outside of Postfix.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       The table search order is as follows:

       o      Look up the "user+extension@domain.tld"  address  including  the
              optional address extension.

       o      Look  up  the  "user@domain.tld"  address  without  the optional
              address extension.

       o      Look up the "user+extension" address local part when the recipi-
              ent domain equals $myorigin, $mydestination, $inet_interfaces or
              $proxy_interfaces.

       o      Look up the "user" address local part when the recipient  domain
              equals    $myorigin,    $mydestination,    $inet_interfaces   or
              $proxy_interfaces.

       o      Look up the "@domain.tld" part.

       Specify the types and names of databases to  use.   After  change,  run
       "postmap /etc/postfix/recipient_bcc".

       Note:  if  mail  to  the BCC address bounces it will be returned to the
       sender.

       Note: automatic BCC recipients are produced  only  for  new  mail.   To
       avoid mailer loops, automatic BCC recipients are not generated for mail
       that Postfix forwards internally, nor for mail that  Postfix  generates
       itself.

       Example:

       recipient_bcc_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/recipient_bcc

recipient_canonical_classes (default: envelope_recipient, header_recipient)
       What addresses are subject to recipient_canonical_maps address mapping.
       By default, recipient_canonical_maps  address  mapping  is  applied  to
       envelope recipient addresses, and to header recipient addresses.

       Specify one or more of: envelope_recipient, header_recipient

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

recipient_canonical_maps (default: empty)
       Optional  address mapping lookup tables for envelope and header recipi-
       ent addresses.  The table format and lookups are documented in  canoni-
       cal(5).

       Note: $recipient_canonical_maps is processed before $canonical_maps.

       Example:

       recipient_canonical_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/recipient_canonical

recipient_delimiter (default: empty)
       The  separator  between  user  names and address extensions (user+foo).
       See canonical(5), local(8), relocated(5) and virtual(5) for the effects
       this has on aliases, canonical, virtual, relocated and on .forward file
       lookups.  Basically,  the  software  tries  user+foo  and  .forward+foo
       before trying user and .forward.

       Example:

       recipient_delimiter = +

reject_code (default: 554)
       The  numerical  Postfix  SMTP  server  response code when a remote SMTP
       client request is rejected by the "reject" restriction.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

relay_clientcerts (default: empty)
       List  of  tables  with  remote SMTP client-certificate fingerprints for
       which  the  Postfix  SMTP  server  will  allow  access  with  the  per-
       mit_tls_clientcerts  feature.  The fingerprint digest algorithm is con-
       figurable via the smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest parameter (hard-coded as
       md5 prior to Postfix version 2.5).

       Postfix  lookup tables are in the form of (key, value) pairs.  Since we
       only need the key, the value can be chosen freely, e.g.   the  name  of
       the   user   or  host:  D7:04:2F:A7:0B:8C:A5:21:FA:31:77:E1:41:8A:EE:80
       lutzpc.at.home

       Example:

       relay_clientcerts = hash:/etc/postfix/relay_clientcerts

       For more fine-grained control,  use  check_ccert_access  to  select  an
       appropriate   access(5)   policy   for   each   client.   See  RESTRIC-
       TION_CLASS_README.

       This feature is available with Postfix version 2.2.

relay_destination_concurrency_limit   (default:   $default_destination_concur-
       rency_limit)
       The  maximal  number of parallel deliveries to the same destination via
       the relay message delivery transport. This limit  is  enforced  by  the
       queue  manager.  The message delivery transport name is the first field
       in the entry in the master.cf file.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

relay_destination_recipient_limit    (default:    $default_destination_recipi-
       ent_limit)
       The  maximal  number  of  recipients per delivery via the relay message
       delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the  queue  manager.  The
       message  delivery transport name is the first field in the entry in the
       master.cf file.

       Setting this  parameter  to  a  value  of  1  changes  the  meaning  of
       relay_destination_concurrency_limit  from  concurrency  per domain into
       concurrency per recipient.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

relay_domains (default: $mydestination)
       What destination domains (and  subdomains  thereof)  this  system  will
       relay   mail  to.  Subdomain  matching  is  controlled  with  the  par-
       ent_domain_matches_subdomains parameter.  For  details  about  how  the
       relay_domains   value   is  used,  see  the  description  of  the  per-
       mit_auth_destination  and  reject_unauth_destination   SMTP   recipient
       restrictions.

       Domains  that match $relay_domains are delivered with the $relay_trans-
       port mail delivery  transport.  The  SMTP  server  validates  recipient
       addresses  with  $relay_recipient_maps and rejects non-existent recipi-
       ents.   See   also   the   relay   domains   address   class   in   the
       ADDRESS_CLASS_README file.

       Note: Postfix will not automatically forward mail for domains that list
       this  system  as  their  primary  or  backup  MX  host.  See  the  per-
       mit_mx_backup restriction in the postconf(5) manual page.

       Specify  a  list  of  host  or  domain  names, "/file/name" patterns or
       "type:table" lookup tables,  separated  by  commas  and/or  whitespace.
       Continue  long  lines  by  starting  the  next  line with whitespace. A
       "/file/name" pattern is replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup
       table  is matched when a (parent) domain appears as lookup key. Specify
       "!pattern" to exclude a domain from the list. The form "!/file/name" is
       supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

relay_domains_reject_code (default: 554)
       The  numerical  Postfix SMTP server response code when a client request
       is rejected by the reject_unauth_destination recipient restriction.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

relay_recipient_maps (default: empty)
       Optional  lookup  tables  with  all valid addresses in the domains that
       match $relay_domains. Specify @domain as a wild-card for  domains  that
       have  no valid recipient list, and become a source of backscatter mail:
       Postfix accepts spam for non-existent recipients and then floods  inno-
       cent  people  with undeliverable mail.  Technically, tables listed with
       $relay_recipient_maps are used as lists: Postfix needs to know only  if
       a  lookup  string  is found or not, but it does not use the result from
       table lookup.

       If this parameter is non-empty,  then  the  Postfix  SMTP  server  will
       reject mail to unknown relay users. This feature is off by default.

       See  also  the  relay domains address class in the ADDRESS_CLASS_README
       file.

       Example:

       relay_recipient_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/relay_recipients

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

relay_transport (default: relay)
       The default mail delivery transport and next-hop destination for remote
       delivery  to domains listed with $relay_domains. In order of decreasing
       precedence, the nexthop destination  is  taken  from  $relay_transport,
       $sender_dependent_relayhost_maps,  $relayhost,  or  from  the recipient
       domain. This information can be overruled with the transport(5)  table.

       Specify  a string of the form transport:nexthop, where transport is the
       name of a mail delivery transport defined in master.cf.   The  :nexthop
       part is optional.  For more details see the transport(5) manual page.

       See  also  the  relay domains address class in the ADDRESS_CLASS_README
       file.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

relayhost (default: empty)
       The next-hop destination of non-local mail; overrides non-local domains
       in recipient addresses. This information is overruled with relay_trans-
       port, default_transport, sender_dependent_relayhost_maps and  with  the
       transport(5) table.

       On  an intranet, specify the organizational domain name. If your inter-
       nal DNS uses no MX records, specify the name of  the  intranet  gateway
       host instead.

       In  the  case  of SMTP, specify a domain name, hostname, hostname:port,
       [hostname]:port, [hostaddress] or [hostaddress]:port. The  form  [host-
       name] turns off MX lookups.

       If  you're  connected  via  UUCP,  see  the UUCP_README file for useful
       information.

       Examples:

       relayhost = $mydomain
       relayhost = [gateway.my.domain]
       relayhost = uucphost
       relayhost = [an.ip.add.ress]

relocated_maps (default: empty)
       Optional lookup tables  with  new  contact  information  for  users  or
       domains  that  no longer exist.  The table format and lookups are docu-
       mented in relocated(5).

       If you use this feature, run "postmap /etc/postfix/relocated" to  build
       the  necessary  DBM  or  DB file after change, then "postfix reload" to
       make the changes visible.

       Examples:

       relocated_maps = dbm:/etc/postfix/relocated
       relocated_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/relocated

remote_header_rewrite_domain (default: empty)
       Don't rewrite message headers from remote  clients  at  all  when  this
       parameter  is  empty; otherwise, rewrite message headers and append the
       specified domain name to incomplete  addresses.   The  local_header_re-
       write_clients  parameter controls what clients Postfix considers local.

       Examples:

       The  safe  setting:  append  "domain.invalid"  to   incomplete   header
       addresses  from  remote SMTP clients, so that those addresses cannot be
       confused with local addresses.

           remote_header_rewrite_domain = domain.invalid

       The default, purist, setting: don't rewrite headers from remote clients
       at all.

           remote_header_rewrite_domain =

require_home_directory (default: no)
       Whether  or not a local(8) recipient's home directory must exist before
       mail delivery is attempted. By default this test is disabled.   It  can
       be  useful  for  environments  that import home directories to the mail
       server (NOT RECOMMENDED).

resolve_dequoted_address (default: yes)
       Resolve a recipient address safely instead  of  correctly,  by  looking
       inside quotes.

       By  default,  the  Postfix  address resolver does not quote the address
       localpart as per RFC 822, so that additional @ or  %  or  !   operators
       remain visible. This behavior is safe but it is also technically incor-
       rect.

       If you  specify  "resolve_dequoted_address  =  no",  then  the  Postfix
       resolver will not know about additional @ etc. operators in the address
       localpart. This opens opportunities for obscure mail relay attacks with
       user@domain@domain  addresses  when  Postfix provides backup MX service
       for Sendmail systems.

resolve_null_domain (default: no)
       Resolve an address that ends in the "@" null domain  as  if  the  local
       hostname were specified, instead of rejecting the address as invalid.

       This  feature  is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.  Earlier versions
       always resolve the null domain as the local hostname.

       The Postfix SMTP server uses this feature to reject  mail  from  or  to
       addresses  that end in the "@" null domain, and from addresses that re-
       write into a form that ends in the "@" null domain.

resolve_numeric_domain (default: no)
       Resolve "user@ipaddress" as "user@[ipaddress]",  instead  of  rejecting
       the address as invalid.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

rewrite_service_name (default: rewrite)
       The  name  of  the  address  rewriting  service.  This service rewrites
       addresses to standard form and resolves them  to  a  (delivery  method,
       next-hop host, recipient) triple.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

sample_directory (default: /etc/postfix)
       The name of the directory with example Postfix configuration files.

send_cyrus_sasl_authzid (default: no)
       When  authenticating  to  a remote SMTP or LMTP server with the default
       setting "no", send no SASL authoriZation ID (authzid);  send  only  the
       SASL authentiCation ID (authcid) plus the authcid's password.

       The  non-default  setting  "yes"  enables the behavior of older Postfix
       versions.  These always send a SASL authzid that is equal to  the  SASL
       authcid,  but  this  causes  inter-operability  problems with some SMTP
       servers.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.4.4 and later.

sender_based_routing (default: no)
       This parameter should not be used. It  was  replaced  by  sender_depen-
       dent_relayhost_maps in Postfix version 2.3.

sender_bcc_maps (default: empty)
       Optional  BCC  (blind  carbon-copy)  address  lookup tables, indexed by
       sender address.  The BCC address (multiple results are  not  supported)
       is added when mail enters from outside of Postfix.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       The table search order is as follows:

       o      Look  up  the  "user+extension@domain.tld" address including the
              optional address extension.

       o      Look up  the  "user@domain.tld"  address  without  the  optional
              address extension.

       o      Look  up the "user+extension" address local part when the sender
              domain equals  $myorigin,  $mydestination,  $inet_interfaces  or
              $proxy_interfaces.

       o      Look  up  the  "user"  address local part when the sender domain
              equals   $myorigin,    $mydestination,    $inet_interfaces    or
              $proxy_interfaces.

       o      Look up the "@domain.tld" part.

       Specify  the  types  and  names of databases to use.  After change, run
       "postmap /etc/postfix/sender_bcc".

       Note: if mail to the BCC address bounces it will  be  returned  to  the
       sender.

       Note:  automatic  BCC  recipients  are  produced only for new mail.  To
       avoid mailer loops, automatic BCC recipients are not generated for mail
       that  Postfix  forwards internally, nor for mail that Postfix generates
       itself.

       Example:

       sender_bcc_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/sender_bcc

sender_canonical_classes (default: envelope_sender, header_sender)
       What addresses are subject to  sender_canonical_maps  address  mapping.
       By  default,  sender_canonical_maps address mapping is applied to enve-
       lope sender addresses, and to header sender addresses.

       Specify one or more of: envelope_sender, header_sender

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

sender_canonical_maps (default: empty)
       Optional address mapping lookup tables for envelope and  header  sender
       addresses.   The  table  format  and  lookups are documented in canoni-
       cal(5).

       Example: you want to rewrite the SENDER address  "user@ugly.domain"  to
       "user@pretty.domain", while still being able to send mail to the RECIP-
       IENT address "user@ugly.domain".

       Note: $sender_canonical_maps is processed before $canonical_maps.

       Example:

       sender_canonical_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/sender_canonical

sender_dependent_relayhost_maps (default: empty)
       A sender-dependent override for the global relayhost parameter setting.
       The  tables  are  searched  by the envelope sender address and @domain.
       This information is overruled with  relay_transport,  default_transport
       and with the transport(5) table.

       For  safety  reasons, this feature does not allow $number substitutions
       in regular expression maps.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

sendmail_path (default: see postconf -d output)
       A Sendmail compatibility feature that specifies  the  location  of  the
       Postfix  sendmail(1)  command.  This command can be used to submit mail
       into the Postfix queue.

service_throttle_time (default: 60s)
       How long the Postfix master(8)  waits  before  forking  a  server  that
       appears to be malfunctioning.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

setgid_group (default: postdrop)
       The group ownership of set-gid Postfix commands and  of  group-writable
       Postfix  directories.  When this parameter value is changed you need to
       re-run "postfix set-permissions" (with Postfix version 2.0 and earlier:
       "/etc/postfix/post-install set-permissions".

show_user_unknown_table_name (default: yes)
       Display  the  name  of  the  recipient  table  in  the  "User  unknown"
       responses.  The extra detail makes trouble  shooting  easier  but  also
       reveals information that is nobody elses business.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

showq_service_name (default: showq)
       The name of the showq(8) service. This service produces mail queue sta-
       tus reports.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

smtp_always_send_ehlo (default: yes)
       Always send EHLO at the start of an SMTP session.

       With "smtp_always_send_ehlo = no", Postfix sends  EHLO  only  when  the
       word  "ESMTP"  appears  in  the  server  greeting  banner (example: 220
       spike.porcupine.org ESMTP Postfix).

smtp_bind_address (default: empty)
       An optional numerical network address  that  the  Postfix  SMTP  client
       should bind to when making an IPv4 connection.

       This  can  be specified in the main.cf file for all SMTP clients, or it
       can be specified in the master.cf file for a specific client, for exam-
       ple:

           /etc/postfix/master.cf:
               smtp ... smtp -o smtp_bind_address=11.22.33.44

       Note  1:  when inet_interfaces specifies no more than one IPv4 address,
       and that address is a non-loopback address, it is automatically used as
       the  smtp_bind_address.  This supports virtual IP hosting, but can be a
       problem on multi-homed firewalls. See the inet_interfaces documentation
       for more detail.

       Note 2: address information may be enclosed inside [], but this form is
       not required here.

smtp_bind_address6 (default: empty)
       An optional numerical network address  that  the  Postfix  SMTP  client
       should bind to when making an IPv6 connection.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

       This  can  be specified in the main.cf file for all SMTP clients, or it
       can be specified in the master.cf file for a specific client, for exam-
       ple:

           /etc/postfix/master.cf:
               smtp ... smtp -o smtp_bind_address6=1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8

       Note  1:  when inet_interfaces specifies no more than one IPv6 address,
       and that address is a non-loopback address, it is automatically used as
       the smtp_bind_address6.  This supports virtual IP hosting, but can be a
       problem on multi-homed firewalls. See the inet_interfaces documentation
       for more detail.

       Note 2: address information may be enclosed inside [], but this form is
       not recommended here.

smtp_body_checks (default: empty)
       Restricted body_checks(5) tables for the Postfix  SMTP  client.   These
       tables are searched while mail is being delivered.  Actions that change
       the delivery time or destination are not available.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_cname_overrides_servername (default: version dependent)
       Allow DNS CNAME records to override the  servername  that  the  Postfix
       SMTP  client  uses  for logging, SASL password lookup, TLS policy deci-
       sions, or TLS certificate verification. The value "no" hardens  Postfix
       smtp_tls_per_site hostname-based policies against false hostname infor-
       mation in DNS CNAME records, and makes SASL password file lookups  more
       predictable. This is the default setting as of Postfix 2.3.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2.9 and later.

smtp_connect_timeout (default: 30s)
       The  SMTP  client  time  limit for completing a TCP connection, or zero
       (use the operating system built-in time limit).

       When no connection can be made within the deadline,  the  Postfix  SMTP
       client  tries the next address on the mail exchanger list. Specify 0 to
       disable the time limit (i.e. use whatever timeout is implemented by the
       operating system).

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

smtp_connection_cache_destinations (default: empty)
       Permanently enable SMTP connection caching for the  specified  destina-
       tions.   With SMTP connection caching, a connection is not closed imme-
       diately after completion of a mail transaction.  Instead,  the  connec-
       tion  is kept open for up to $smtp_connection_cache_time_limit seconds.
       This allows connections to be reused  for  other  deliveries,  and  can
       improve mail delivery performance.

       Specify  a  comma  or  white  space  separated  list of destinations or
       pseudo-destinations:

       o      if mail is sent without a relay host: a domain name (the  right-
              hand  side  of an email address, without the [] around a numeric
              IP address),

       o      if mail is sent via a relay host: a relay host name (without  []
              or  non-default  TCP  port),  as  specified in main.cf or in the
              transport map,

       o      if mail is sent via a UNIX-domain socket:  a  pathname  (without
              the unix: prefix),

       o      a  /file/name  with  domain  names  and/or  relay  host names as
              defined above,

       o      a "type:table" with domain names and/or relay host names on  the
              left-hand  side.   The  right-hand side result from "type:table"
              lookups is ignored.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_connection_cache_on_demand (default: yes)
       Temporarily enable SMTP connection caching while a  destination  has  a
       high volume of mail in the active queue.  With SMTP connection caching,
       a connection is not closed  immediately  after  completion  of  a  mail
       transaction.  Instead, the connection is kept open for up to $smtp_con-
       nection_cache_time_limit seconds.  This allows connections to be reused
       for other deliveries, and can improve mail delivery performance.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_connection_cache_reuse_limit (default: 10)
       When  SMTP  connection  caching is enabled, the number of times that an
       SMTP session may be reused before it is closed.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2. In Postfix 2.3 it is replaced
       by $smtp_connection_reuse_time_limit.

smtp_connection_cache_time_limit (default: 2s)
       When  SMTP  connection  caching  is enabled, the amount of time that an
       unused SMTP client socket is kept open before it  is  closed.   Do  not
       specify larger values without permission from the remote sites.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_connection_reuse_time_limit (default: 300s)
       The  amount  of  time  during which Postfix will use an SMTP connection
       repeatedly.  The timer starts when the connection is initiated (i.e. it
       includes  the  connect,  greeting  and helo latency, in addition to the
       latencies of subsequent mail delivery transactions).

       This feature addresses a performance stability problem with remote SMTP
       servers.  This  problem  is not specific to Postfix: it can happen when
       any MTA sends large amounts of SMTP email to a site that  has  multiple
       MX hosts.

       The  problem  starts  when one of a set of MX hosts becomes slower than
       the rest.  Even though SMTP clients connect to fast and slow  MX  hosts
       with equal probability, the slow MX host ends up with more simultaneous
       inbound connections than the faster MX hosts, because the slow MX  host
       needs more time to serve each client request.

       The  slow  MX  host  becomes  a  connection  attractor.  If one MX host
       becomes N times slower  than  the  rest,  it  dominates  mail  delivery
       latency  unless  there  are  more  than  N fast MX hosts to counter the
       effect. And if the number of MX hosts  is  smaller  than  N,  the  mail
       delivery  latency  becomes  effectively  that  of  the  slowest MX host
       divided by the total number of MX hosts.

       The solution uses connection caching in a way that differs from Postfix
       version  2.2.  By limiting the amount of time during which a connection
       can be used repeatedly (instead of limiting the  number  of  deliveries
       over  that  connection), Postfix not only restores fairness in the dis-
       tribution of simultaneous connections across a set of MX hosts, it also
       favors  deliveries over connections that perform well, which is exactly
       what we want.

       The default reuse time limit, 300s, is comparable to the  various  smtp
       transaction timeouts which are fair estimates of maximum excess latency
       for a slow delivery.  Note that hosts may accept thousands of  messages
       over  a  single  connection  within  the  default connection reuse time
       limit. This number is much larger than the default Postfix version  2.2
       limit  of  10 messages per cached connection. It may prove necessary to
       lower the limit to avoid interoperability issues with MTAs that exhibit
       bugs when many messages are delivered via a single connection.  A lower
       reuse time limit risks losing the benefit of connection reuse when  the
       average  connection  and  mail  delivery latency exceeds the reuse time
       limit.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_data_done_timeout (default: 600s)
       The SMTP client time limit for sending the SMTP ".", and for  receiving
       the server response.

       When  no  response is received within the deadline, a warning is logged
       that the mail may be delivered multiple times.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

smtp_data_init_timeout (default: 120s)
       The  SMTP  client time limit for sending the SMTP DATA command, and for
       receiving the server response.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

smtp_data_xfer_timeout (default: 180s)
       The  SMTP client time limit for sending the SMTP message content.  When
       the connection makes no progress for more than  $smtp_data_xfer_timeout
       seconds the Postfix SMTP client terminates the transfer.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

smtp_defer_if_no_mx_address_found (default: no)
       Defer mail delivery when no MX record resolves to an IP address.

       The default (no) is to return the mail  as  undeliverable.  With  older
       Postfix  versions  the  default  was to keep trying to deliver the mail
       until someone fixed the MX record or until the mail was too old.

       Note: Postfix always ignores MX records with equal or worse  preference
       than the local MTA itself.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_destination_concurrency_limit    (default:   $default_destination_concur-
       rency_limit)
       The maximal number of parallel deliveries to the same  destination  via
       the  smtp  message  delivery  transport.  This limit is enforced by the
       queue manager. The message delivery transport name is the  first  field
       in the entry in the master.cf file.

smtp_destination_recipient_limit     (default:    $default_destination_recipi-
       ent_limit)
       The maximal number of recipients per  delivery  via  the  smtp  message
       delivery  transport.  This  limit is enforced by the queue manager. The
       message delivery transport name is the first field in the entry in  the
       master.cf file.

       Setting this parameter to a value of 1 changes the meaning of smtp_des-
       tination_concurrency_limit from concurrency per domain into concurrency
       per recipient.

smtp_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps (default: empty)
       Lookup  tables,  indexed  by  the remote SMTP server address, with case
       insensitive lists of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls,  auth,  etc.)
       that  the  Postfix  SMTP client will ignore in the EHLO response from a
       remote SMTP server. See smtp_discard_ehlo_keywords for details. The ta-
       ble  is  not  indexed  by  hostname  for  consistency  with  smtpd_dis-
       card_ehlo_keyword_address_maps.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_discard_ehlo_keywords (default: empty)
       A case insensitive list of EHLO keywords (pipelining,  starttls,  auth,
       etc.)  that  the  Postfix  SMTP client will ignore in the EHLO response
       from a remote SMTP server.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

       Notes:

       o      Specify the silent-discard pseudo keyword to prevent this action
              from being logged.

       o      Use  the  smtp_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps feature to dis-
              card EHLO keywords selectively.

smtp_enforce_tls (default: no)
       Enforcement mode: require that remote SMTP servers use TLS  encryption,
       and  never  send mail in the clear.  This also requires that the remote
       SMTP server hostname matches the information in the remote server  cer-
       tificate,  and  that the remote SMTP server certificate was issued by a
       CA that is trusted by the  Postfix  SMTP  client.  If  the  certificate
       doesn't  verify or the hostname doesn't match, delivery is deferred and
       mail stays in the queue.

       The server hostname is matched against all names provided  as  dNSNames
       in  the SubjectAlternativeName.  If no dNSNames are specified, the Com-
       monName  is  checked.   The  behavior   may   be   changed   with   the
       smtp_tls_enforce_peername option.

       This  option  is  useful  only if you are definitely sure that you will
       only connect to servers that support RFC 2487 _and_ that provide  valid
       server  certificates.   Typical  use is for clients that send all their
       email to a dedicated mailhub.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.  With  Postfix  2.3
       and later use smtp_tls_security_level instead.

smtp_fallback_relay (default: $fallback_relay)
       Optional  list of relay hosts for SMTP destinations that can't be found
       or that are unreachable. With Postfix 2.2 and earlier this parameter is
       called fallback_relay.

       By  default,  mail  is returned to the sender when a destination is not
       found, and delivery is deferred when a destination is unreachable.

       The fallback relays must be SMTP destinations. Specify a domain,  host,
       host:port,  [host]:port,  [address]  or [address]:port; the form [host]
       turns off MX lookups.  If you specify multiple SMTP destinations, Post-
       fix will try them in the specified order.

       To  prevent  mailer loops between MX hosts and fall-back hosts, Postfix
       version 2.2 and later will not use the fallback relays for destinations
       that it is MX host for (and DSN lookup is turned on).

smtp_generic_maps (default: empty)
       Optional  lookup  tables  that  perform  address  rewriting in the SMTP
       client, typically to transform a locally valid address into a  globally
       valid  address  when  sending mail across the Internet.  This is needed
       when the local machine does not have its own Internet domain name,  but
       uses something like localdomain.local instead.

       The table format and lookups are documented in generic(5); examples are
       shown in the ADDRESS_REWRITING_README and STANDARD_CONFIGURATION_README
       documents.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_header_checks (default: empty)
       Restricted  header_checks(5) tables for the Postfix SMTP client.  These
       tables are searched while mail is being delivered.  Actions that change
       the delivery time or destination are not available.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_helo_name (default: $myhostname)
       The hostname to send in the SMTP EHLO or HELO command.

       The  default  value  is  the  machine  hostname.  Specify a hostname or
       [ip.add.re.ss].

       This information can be specified in the  main.cf  file  for  all  SMTP
       clients,  or  it  can be specified in the master.cf file for a specific
       client, for example:

           /etc/postfix/master.cf:
               mysmtp ... smtp -o smtp_helo_name=foo.bar.com

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

smtp_helo_timeout (default: 300s)
       The SMTP client time limit for sending the HELO or  EHLO  command,  and
       for receiving the initial server response.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

smtp_host_lookup (default: dns)
       What mechanisms when the Postfix SMTP client uses to look up  a  host's
       IP address.  This parameter is ignored when DNS lookups are disabled.

       Specify one of the following:

       dns    Hosts can be found in the DNS (preferred).

       native Use the native naming service only (nsswitch.conf, or equivalent
              mechanism).

       dns, native
              Use the native service for hosts not found in the DNS.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_line_length_limit (default: 990)
       The maximal length of message header and body lines that  Postfix  will
       send via SMTP.  Longer lines are broken by inserting "<CR><LF><SPACE>".
       This minimizes the damage to MIME formatted mail.

       By default, the line length is limited to 990 characters, because  some
       server implementations cannot receive mail with long lines.

smtp_mail_timeout (default: 300s)
       The  SMTP  client time limit for sending the MAIL FROM command, and for
       receiving the server response.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

smtp_mime_header_checks (default: empty)
       Restricted  mime_header_checks(5)  tables  for the Postfix SMTP client.
       These tables are searched while mail is being delivered.  Actions  that
       change the delivery time or destination are not available.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_mx_address_limit (default: 5)
       The  maximal number of MX (mail exchanger) IP addresses that can result
       from mail exchanger lookups, or zero (no limit). Prior to Postfix  ver-
       sion 2.3, this limit was disabled by default.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_mx_session_limit (default: 2)
       The  maximal number of SMTP sessions per delivery request before giving
       up or delivering to a fall-back relay host, or zero  (no  limit).  This
       restriction  ignores  sessions  that  fail to complete the SMTP initial
       handshake (Postfix version 2.2 and earlier) or that  fail  to  complete
       the EHLO and TLS handshake (Postfix version 2.3 and later).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_nested_header_checks (default: empty)
       Restricted  nested_header_checks(5) tables for the Postfix SMTP client.
       These tables are searched while mail is being delivered.  Actions  that
       change the delivery time or destination are not available.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_never_send_ehlo (default: no)
       Never  send  EHLO  at  the  start  of  an  SMTP  session.  See also the
       smtp_always_send_ehlo parameter.

smtp_pix_workaround_delay_time (default: 10s)
       How long the Postfix SMTP client pauses before sending  ".<CR><LF>"  in
       order to work around the PIX firewall "<CR><LF>.<CR><LF>" bug.

       Choosing  a too short time makes this workaround ineffective when send-
       ing large messages over slow network connections.

smtp_pix_workaround_maps (default: empty)
       Lookup tables, indexed by the remote SMTP server address, with per-des-
       tination  workarounds  for  CISCO  PIX firewall bugs.  The table is not
       indexed  by  hostname  for  consistency   with   smtp_discard_ehlo_key-
       word_address_maps.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

smtp_pix_workaround_threshold_time (default: 500s)
       How  long a message must be queued before the Postfix SMTP client turns
       on the PIX firewall "<CR><LF>.<CR><LF>"  bug  workaround  for  delivery
       through firewalls with "smtp fixup" mode turned on.

       By  default,  the  workaround is turned off for mail that is queued for
       less than 500 seconds. In  other  words,  the  workaround  is  normally
       turned off for the first delivery attempt.

       Specify 0 to enable the PIX firewall "<CR><LF>.<CR><LF>" bug workaround
       upon the first delivery attempt.

smtp_pix_workarounds (default: disable_esmtp, delay_dotcrlf)
       A list that specifies zero or more workarounds for CISCO  PIX  firewall
       bugs.  These  workarounds  are  implemented by the Postfix SMTP client.
       Workaround names are separated by comma or space, and are case insensi-
       tive.   This  parameter  setting  can be overruled with per-destination
       smtp_pix_workaround_maps settings.

       delay_dotcrlf
              Insert a delay before sending ".<CR><LF>" after the end  of  the
              message  content.   The  delay  is subject to the smtp_pix_work-
              around_delay_time and smtp_pix_workaround_threshold_time parame-
              ter settings.

       disable_esmtp
              Disable all extended SMTP commands: send HELO instead of EHLO.

       This  feature  is  available in Postfix 2.4 and later. The default set-
       tings are backwards compatible with earlier Postfix versions.

smtp_quit_timeout (default: 300s)
       The SMTP client time limit  for  sending  the  QUIT  command,  and  for
       receiving the server response.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

smtp_quote_rfc821_envelope (default: yes)
       Quote addresses in SMTP MAIL FROM and RCPT TO commands as  required  by
       RFC  821. This includes putting quotes around an address localpart that
       ends in ".".

       The default is to comply with RFC 821. If you have to send  mail  to  a
       broken SMTP server, configure a special SMTP client in master.cf:

           /etc/postfix/master.cf:
               broken-smtp . . . smtp -o smtp_quote_rfc821_envelope=no

       and  route  mail  for  the destination in question to the "broken-smtp"
       message delivery with a transport(5) table.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_randomize_addresses (default: yes)
       Randomize the order of equal-preference MX host addresses.  This  is  a
       performance feature of the Postfix SMTP client.

smtp_rcpt_timeout (default: 300s)
       The  SMTP  client  time limit for sending the SMTP RCPT TO command, and
       for receiving the server response.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

smtp_rset_timeout (default: 20s)
       The  SMTP  client  time  limit  for  sending  the RSET command, and for
       receiving the server response. The SMTP client sends RSET in  order  to
       finish a recipient address probe, or to verify that a cached session is
       still usable.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_sasl_auth_cache_name (default: empty)
       An optional table to prevent repeated SASL authentication failures with
       the same remote SMTP server hostname, username and password. Each table
       (key, value) pair contains a server name, a username and password,  and
       the full server response. This information is stored when a remote SMTP
       server rejects an authentication attempt with a  535  reply  code.   As
       long  as the smtp_sasl_password_maps information does no change, and as
       long as the smtp_sasl_auth_cache_name information does not expire  (see
       smtp_sasl_auth_cache_time)  the Postfix SMTP client avoids SASL authen-
       tication attempts with the same  server,  username  and  password,  and
       instead    bounces    or   defers   mail   as   controlled   with   the
       smtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce configuration parameter.

       Use  a  per-destination  delivery  concurrency  of  1   (for   example,
       "smtp_destination_concurrency_limit  =  1",  "relay_destination_concur-
       rency_limit = 1", etc.), otherwise multiple delivery agents may experi-
       ence a login failure at the same time.

       The  table  must  be  accessed via the proxywrite service, i.e. the map
       name must start with "proxy:". The table should  be  stored  under  the
       directory specified with the data_directory parameter.

       This  feature  uses  cryptographic  hashing to protect plain-text pass-
       words, and requires that Postfix is compiled with TLS support.

       Example:

       smtp_sasl_auth_cache_name = proxy:btree:/var/db/postfix/sasl_auth_cache

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_sasl_auth_cache_time (default: 90d)
       The maximal age of an  smtp_sasl_auth_cache_name  entry  before  it  is
       removed.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_sasl_auth_enable (default: no)
       Enable SASL authentication in the Postfix SMTP client.  By default, the
       Postfix SMTP client uses no authentication.

       Example:

       smtp_sasl_auth_enable = yes

smtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce (default: yes)
       When a remote SMTP server rejects a SASL authentication request with  a
       535  reply code, defer mail delivery instead of returning mail as unde-
       liverable. The latter behavior was hard-coded prior to Postfix  version
       2.5.

       Note: the setting "yes" overrides the global soft_bounce parameter, but
       the setting "no" does not.

       Example:

       # Default as of Postfix 2.5
       smtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce = yes
       # The old hard-coded default
       smtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce = no

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_sasl_mechanism_filter (default: empty)
       If non-empty, a Postfix SMTP client filter for the remote SMTP server's
       list of offered SASL mechanisms.  Different client and server implemen-
       tations may support different mechanism lists. By default, the  Postfix
       SMTP  client  will  use  the  intersection of the two. smtp_sasl_mecha-
       nism_filter further restricts what server mechanisms  the  client  will
       take into consideration.

       Specify  mechanism  names, "/file/name" patterns or "type:table" lookup
       tables.  The  right-hand  side  result  from  "type:table"  lookups  is
       ignored.  Specify "!pattern" to exclude a mechanism name from the list.
       The form "!/file/name" is supported only in  Postfix  version  2.4  and
       later.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

       Examples:

       smtp_sasl_mechanism_filter = plain, login
       smtp_sasl_mechanism_filter = /etc/postfix/smtp_mechs
       smtp_sasl_mechanism_filter = !gssapi, !login, static:rest

smtp_sasl_password_maps (default: empty)
       Optional SMTP client lookup tables with one username:password entry per
       remote hostname or domain,  or  sender  address  when  sender-dependent
       authentication  is  enabled.   If  no username:password entry is found,
       then the Postfix SMTP client will not attempt to  authenticate  to  the
       remote host.

       The  Postfix  SMTP client opens the lookup table before going to chroot
       jail, so you can leave the password file in /etc/postfix.

smtp_sasl_path (default: empty)
       Implementation-specific information that the Postfix SMTP client passes
       through  to  the  SASL  plug-in  implementation  that  is selected with
       smtp_sasl_type.  Typically this specifies the name of  a  configuration
       file or rendezvous point.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_sasl_security_options (default: noplaintext, noanonymous)
       Postfix  SMTP  client SASL security options; as of Postfix 2.3 the list
       of available features depends on the SASL client implementation that is
       selected with smtp_sasl_type.

       The  following  security features are defined for the cyrus client SASL
       implementation:

       Specify zero or more of the following:

       noplaintext
              Disallow methods that use plaintext passwords.

       noactive
              Disallow methods subject to active (non-dictionary) attack.

       nodictionary
              Disallow methods subject to passive (dictionary) attack.

       noanonymous
              Disallow methods that allow anonymous authentication.

       mutual_auth
              Only allow  methods  that  provide  mutual  authentication  (not
              available with SASL version 1).

       Example:

       smtp_sasl_security_options = noplaintext

smtp_sasl_tls_security_options (default: $smtp_sasl_security_options)
       The  SASL  authentication security options that the Postfix SMTP client
       uses for TLS encrypted SMTP sessions.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_sasl_tls_verified_security_options     (default:     $smtp_sasl_tls_secu-
       rity_options)
       The  SASL  authentication security options that the Postfix SMTP client
       uses for TLS encrypted SMTP sessions with a  verified  server  certifi-
       cate. This feature is under construction as of Postfix version 2.3.

smtp_sasl_type (default: cyrus)
       The  SASL  plug-in  type  that  the  Postfix SMTP client should use for
       authentication.  The available types are listed with the "postconf  -A"
       command.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_send_xforward_command (default: no)
       Send  the  non-standard  XFORWARD  command when the Postfix SMTP server
       EHLO response announces XFORWARD support.

       This allows an "smtp" delivery agent, used for injecting  mail  into  a
       content filter, to forward the name, address, protocol and HELO name of
       the original client to the content filter and downstream  queuing  SMTP
       server.  This can produce more useful logging than localhost[127.0.0.1]
       etc.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_sender_dependent_authentication (default: no)
       Enable sender-dependent authentication in the Postfix SMTP client; this
       is  available  only with SASL authentication, and disables SMTP connec-
       tion caching to ensure that mail from different senders  will  use  the
       appropriate credentials.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_skip_4xx_greeting (default: yes)
       Skip SMTP servers that greet with a 4XX status code (go away, try again
       later).

       By  default,  Postfix  moves  on  the  next  mail  exchanger.   Specify
       "smtp_skip_4xx_greeting  = no" if Postfix should defer delivery immedi-
       ately.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and  earlier.   Later  Postfix
       versions always skip SMTP servers that greet with a 4XX status code.

smtp_skip_5xx_greeting (default: yes)
       Skip  SMTP  servers  that greet with a 5XX status code (go away, do not
       try again later).

       By default, the Postfix SMTP client moves on the next  mail  exchanger.
       Specify "smtp_skip_5xx_greeting = no" if Postfix should bounce the mail
       immediately. The default setting is incorrect, but it is what a lot  of
       people expect to happen.

smtp_skip_quit_response (default: yes)
       Do not wait for the response to the SMTP QUIT command.

smtp_starttls_timeout (default: 300s)
       Time limit for Postfix SMTP client write and read operations during TLS
       startup and shutdown handshake procedures.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_CAfile (default: empty)
       The file with the certificate of the certification authority (CA)  that
       issued  the  Postfix SMTP client certificate.  This is needed only when
       the CA certificate is not already present  in  the  client  certificate
       file.

       Example:

       smtp_tls_CAfile = /etc/postfix/CAcert.pem

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_CApath (default: empty)
       Directory  with  PEM format certificate authority certificates that the
       Postfix SMTP client uses to verify a remote  SMTP  server  certificate.
       Don't  forget  to  create the necessary "hash" links with, for example,
       "$OPENSSL_HOME/bin/c_rehash /etc/postfix/certs".

       To use this option in chroot mode, this directory (or a copy)  must  be
       inside the chroot jail.

       Example:

       smtp_tls_CApath = /etc/postfix/certs

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_cert_file (default: empty)
       File  with the Postfix SMTP client RSA certificate in PEM format.  This
       file may also contain the Postfix SMTP  client  private  RSA  key,  and
       these  may  be  the same as the Postfix SMTP server RSA certificate and
       key file.

       Do not configure client certificates unless you must present client TLS
       certificates  to  one or more servers. Client certificates are not usu-
       ally needed, and can cause problems in configurations  that  work  well
       without them. The recommended setting is to let the defaults stand:

           smtp_tls_cert_file =
           smtp_tls_dcert_file =
           smtp_tls_key_file =
           smtp_tls_dkey_file =

       The  best  way  to use the default settings is to comment out the above
       parameters in main.cf if present.

       In order to verify certificates, the CA certificate (in case of a  cer-
       tificate chain, all CA certificates) must be available.  You should add
       these certificates to the client certificate,  the  client  certificate
       first, then the issuing CA(s).

       Example: the certificate for "client.dom.ain" was issued by "intermedi-
       ate CA" which itself has  a  certificate  of  "root  CA".   Create  the
       client.pem   file   with   "cat   client_cert.pem   intermediate_CA.pem
       root_CA.pem > client.pem".

       If you also want to verify remote SMTP server  certificates  issued  by
       these CAs, you can also add the CA certificates to the smtp_tls_CAfile,
       in  which  case  it  is   not   necessary   to   have   them   in   the
       smtp_tls_cert_file or smtp_tls_dcert_file.

       A certificate supplied here must be usable as an SSL client certificate
       and hence pass the "openssl verify -purpose sslclient ..." test.

       Example:

       smtp_tls_cert_file = /etc/postfix/client.pem

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_cipherlist (default: empty)
       Obsolete Postfix < 2.3 control for the Postfix SMTP client  TLS  cipher
       list. As this feature applies to all TLS security levels, it is easy to
       create inter-operability problems  by  choosing  a  non-default  cipher
       list.  Do  not  use a non-default TLS cipher list on hosts that deliver
       email to the public Internet: you will  be  unable  to  send  email  to
       servers  that  only support the ciphers you exclude. Using a restricted
       cipher list may be more appropriate for an internal MTA, where one  can
       exert  some  control  over  the  TLS  software and settings of the peer
       servers.

       Note: do not use "" quotes around the parameter value.

       This feature is available in Postfix version 2.2. It is not  used  with
       Postfix 2.3 and later; use smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers instead.

smtp_tls_dcert_file (default: empty)
       File  with the Postfix SMTP client DSA certificate in PEM format.  This
       file may also contain the Postfix SMTP client private DSA key.

       See the discussion under smtp_tls_cert_file for more details.

       Example:

       smtp_tls_dcert_file = /etc/postfix/client-dsa.pem

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_dkey_file (default: $smtp_tls_dcert_file)
       File with the Postfix SMTP client DSA private key in PEM format.   This
       file  may be combined with the Postfix SMTP client DSA certificate file
       specified with $smtp_tls_dcert_file.

       The private key must be accessible without a pass-phrase, i.e. it  must
       not  be  encrypted, but file permissions should grant read/write access
       only to the system superuser account ("root").

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_enforce_peername (default: yes)
       With mandatory TLS encryption, require  that  the  remote  SMTP  server
       hostname matches the information in the remote SMTP server certificate.
       As of RFC 2487 the requirements for hostname checking for  MTA  clients
       are not specified.

       This  option  can  be set to "no" to disable strict peer name checking.
       This setting has no effect on sessions  that  are  controlled  via  the
       smtp_tls_per_site table.

       Disabling  the  hostname verification can make sense in closed environ-
       ment where special CAs are created.  If not used carefully, this option
       opens  the  danger  of  a "man-in-the-middle" attack (the CommonName of
       this attacker will be logged).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.  With  Postfix  2.3
       and later use smtp_tls_security_level instead.

smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
       List of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the Postfix SMTP client
       cipher list at  all  TLS  security  levels.  This  is  not  an  OpenSSL
       cipherlist,  it is a simple list separated by whitespace and/or commas.
       The elements are a single cipher, or one or more "+"  separated  cipher
       properties,  in which case only ciphers matching all the properties are
       excluded.

       Examples (some of these will cause problems):

           smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers = aNULL
           smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers = MD5, DES
           smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers = DES+MD5
           smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers = AES256-SHA, DES-CBC3-MD5
           smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers = kEDH+aRSA

       The first setting, disables anonymous ciphers. The  next  setting  dis-
       ables  ciphers  that  use  the MD5 digest algorithm or the (single) DES
       encryption algorithm. The next setting disables ciphers  that  use  MD5
       and   DES   together.   The  next  setting  disables  the  two  ciphers
       "AES256-SHA" and "DES-CBC3-MD5". The last setting disables ciphers that
       use "EDH" key exchange with RSA authentication.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match (default: empty)
       List  of acceptable remote SMTP server certificate fingerprints for the
       "fingerprint" TLS security  level  (smtp_tls_security_level  =  finger-
       print).  At  this security level, certificate authorities are not used,
       and certificate expiration times are ignored. Instead, server  certifi-
       cates are verified directly via their "fingerprint". The fingerprint is
       a message digest of the server certificate.  The  digest  algorithm  is
       selected via the smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest parameter.

       When  an  smtp_tls_policy_maps  table entry specifies the "fingerprint"
       security level, any "match" attributes in that entry specify  the  list
       of  valid fingerprints for the corresponding destination. Multiple fin-
       gerprints can be combined with  a  "|"  delimiter  in  a  single  match
       attribute, or multiple match attributes can be employed.

       Example:  Certificate  fingerprint  verification with internal mailhub.
       Two matching fingerprints are listed. The  relayhost  may  be  multiple
       physical hosts behind a load-balancer, each with its own private/public
       key and self-signed certificate. Alternatively, a single relayhost  may
       be  in  the process of switching from one set of private/public keys to
       another, and both keys are trusted just prior to the transition.

           relayhost = [mailhub.example.com]
           smtp_tls_security_level = fingerprint
           smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest = md5
           smtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match =
               3D:95:34:51:24:66:33:B9:D2:40:99:C0:C1:17:0B:D1
               EC:3B:2D:B0:5B:B1:FB:6D:20:A3:9D:72:F6:8D:12:35

       Example: Certificate fingerprint verification  with  selected  destina-
       tions.  As in the example above, we show two matching fingerprints:

           /etc/postfix/main.cf:
               smtp_tls_policy_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/tls_policy
               smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest = md5

           /etc/postfix/tls_policy:
               example.com     fingerprint
                   match=3D:95:34:51:24:66:33:B9:D2:40:99:C0:C1:17:0B:D1
                   match=EC:3B:2D:B0:5B:B1:FB:6D:20:A3:9D:72:F6:8D:12:35

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest (default: md5)
       The  message digest algorithm used to construct remote SMTP server cer-
       tificate  fingerprints.  At  the  "fingerprint"  TLS   security   level
       (smtp_tls_security_level = fingerprint), the server certificate is ver-
       ified by directly matching its fingerprint. The fingerprint is the mes-
       sage  digest  of  the  server certificate using the selected algorithm.
       With a digest algorithm resistant to "second pre-image" attacks, it  is
       not feasible to create a new public key and a matching certificate that
       has the same fingerprint.

       The default algorithm is md5; this is  consistent  with  the  backwards
       compatible  setting of the digest used to verify client certificates in
       the SMTP server.

       The best practice algorithm is now sha1. Recent advances in hash  func-
       tion  cryptanalysis  have led to md5 being deprecated in favor of sha1.
       However, as long as there  are  no  known  "second  pre-image"  attacks
       against md5, its use in this context can still be considered safe.

       While  additional  digest algorithms are often available with OpenSSL's
       libcrypto, only those used by libssl in SSL cipher suites are available
       to Postfix. For now this means just md5 or sha1.

       To find the fingerprint of a specific certificate file, with a specific
       digest algorithm, run:

           $ openssl x509 -noout -fingerprint -digest -in certfile.pem

       The text to the right of "=" sign  is  the  desired  fingerprint.   For
       example:

           $ openssl x509 -noout -fingerprint -sha1 -in cert.pem
           SHA1 Fingerprint=D4:6A:AB:19:24:79:F8:32:BB:A6:CB:66:82:C0:8E:9B:EE:29:A8:1A

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_tls_key_file (default: $smtp_tls_cert_file)
       File  with the Postfix SMTP client RSA private key in PEM format.  This
       file may be combined with the Postfix SMTP client RSA certificate  file
       specified with $smtp_tls_cert_file.

       The  private key must be accessible without a pass-phrase, i.e. it must
       not be encrypted, but file permissions should grant  read/write  access
       only to the system superuser account ("root").

       Example:

       smtp_tls_key_file = $smtp_tls_cert_file

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_loglevel (default: 0)
       Enable  additional  Postfix  SMTP client logging of TLS activity.  Each
       logging level also includes the information that is logged at  a  lower
       logging level.

              0 Disable logging of TLS activity.

              1 Log TLS handshake and certificate information.

              2 Log levels during TLS negotiation.

              3 Log hexadecimal and ASCII dump of TLS negotiation process.

              4  Log hexadecimal and ASCII dump of complete transmission after
              STARTTLS.

       Use "smtp_tls_loglevel = 3" only in case of problems. Use of loglevel 4
       is strongly discouraged.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers (default: medium)
       The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix SMTP client will use with
       mandatory TLS encryption.  The default value "medium" is  suitable  for
       most destinations with which you may want to enforce TLS, and is beyond
       the reach of today's crypt-analytic methods.  See  smtp_tls_policy_maps
       for information on how to configure ciphers on a per-destination basis.

       The following cipher grades are supported:

       export Enable the mainstream "EXPORT" grade or better OpenSSL  ciphers.
              This is always used for opportunistic encryption. It is not rec-
              ommended for mandatory encryption unless you  must  enforce  TLS
              with  "crippled"  peers.  The underlying cipherlist is specified
              via the tls_export_cipherlist configuration parameter, which you
              are  strongly  encouraged  to  not  change. The default value of
              tls_export_cipherlist includes anonymous ciphers, but these  are
              automatically filtered out if the client is configured to verify
              server certificates. If you must exclude anonymous ciphers  also
              at   the   "encrypt"   security   level,   set  "smtp_tls_manda-
              tory_exclude_ciphers = aNULL".

       low    Enable the mainstream "LOW" grade  or  better  OpenSSL  ciphers.
              This setting is only appropriate for internal mail servers.  The
              underlying cipherlist is specified  via  the  tls_low_cipherlist
              configuration  parameter,  which  you are strongly encouraged to
              not change. The default  value  of  tls_low_cipherlist  includes
              anonymous  ciphers,  but these are automatically filtered out if
              the client is configured to verify server certificates.  If  you
              must  exclude  anonymous  ciphers also at the "encrypt" security
              level, set "smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers = aNULL".

       medium Enable the mainstream "MEDIUM" grade or better OpenSSL  ciphers.
              The    underlying    cipherlist    is    specified    via    the
              tls_medium_cipherlist configuration  parameter,  which  you  are
              strongly  encouraged  to  not  change.   The  default  value  of
              tls_medium_cipherlist includes anonymous ciphers, but these  are
              automatically filtered out if the client is configured to verify
              server certificates. If you must exclude anonymous ciphers  also
              at   the   "encrypt"   security   level,   set  "smtp_tls_manda-
              tory_exclude_ciphers = aNULL".

       high   Enable only the mainstream "HIGH" grade OpenSSL  ciphers.   This
              setting  is appropriate when all mandatory TLS destinations sup-
              port some of "HIGH" grade ciphers, this  is  not  uncommon.  The
              underlying  cipherlist  is specified via the tls_high_cipherlist
              configuration parameter, which you are  strongly  encouraged  to
              not  change.  The  default value of tls_high_cipherlist includes
              anonymous ciphers, but these are automatically filtered  out  if
              the  client  is configured to verify server certificates. If you
              must exclude anonymous ciphers also at  the  "encrypt"  security
              level, set "smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers = aNULL".

       null   Enable  only the "NULL" OpenSSL ciphers, these provide authenti-
              cation without encryption.  This setting is only appropriate  in
              the  rare case that all servers are prepared to use NULL ciphers
              (not normally enabled in TLS servers). A plausible  use-case  is
              an LMTP server listening on a UNIX-domain socket that is config-
              ured to support "NULL" ciphers.  The  underlying  cipherlist  is
              specified  via  the tls_null_cipherlist configuration parameter,
              which you are strongly encouraged to  not  change.  The  default
              value of tls_null_cipherlist excludes anonymous ciphers (OpenSSL
              0.9.8 has NULL ciphers that offer data integrity without encryp-
              tion or authentication).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
       Additional  list  of  ciphers  or cipher types to exclude from the SMTP
       client cipher list at mandatory TLS security levels. This list works in
       addition  to  the  exclusions listed with smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers (see
       there for syntax details).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols (default: SSLv3, TLSv1)
       List of SSL/TLS protocols that the Postfix SMTP client  will  use  with
       mandatory  TLS  encryption.   In  main.cf  the  values are separated by
       whitespace, commas or colons. In the policy table "protocols" attribute
       (see  smtp_tls_policy_maps) the only valid separator is colon. An empty
       value means allow all protocols. The valid protocol names, (see  \fBfBSSL_get_version(3)
       ), are "SSLv2", "SSLv3" and "TLSv1".

       With  Postfix >= 2.5 the parameter syntax is expanded to support proto-
       col exclusions.  One  can  now  explicitly  exclude  SSLv2  by  setting
       "smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols  =  !SSLv2".  To  exclude  both SSLv2 and
       SSLv3 set "smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3". Listing  the
       protocols  to  include, rather than protocols to exclude, is still sup-
       ported; use the form you find more intuitive.

       Since SSL version 2 has known protocol weaknesses  and  is  now  depre-
       cated,  the  default  setting  excludes  "SSLv2".   This  means that by
       default, SSL version 2 will not be used at the "encrypt" security level
       and higher.

       See   the  documentation  of  the  smtp_tls_policy_maps  parameter  and
       TLS_README for more information about security levels.

       Example:

       smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = TLSv1
       # Alternative form with Postfix >= 2.5:
       smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_note_starttls_offer (default: no)
       Log the hostname of a remote SMTP server that offers STARTTLS, when TLS
       is not already enabled for that server.

       The logfile record looks like:

       postfix/smtp[pid]:  Host offered STARTTLS: [name.of.host]

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_per_site (default: empty)
       Optional lookup tables with the Postfix SMTP client TLS usage policy by
       next-hop destination and by remote SMTP  server  hostname.   When  both
       lookups  succeed,  the  more specific per-site policy (NONE, MUST, etc)
       overrides the less specific one (MAY), and  the  more  secure  per-site
       policy  (MUST, etc) overrides the less secure one (NONE).  With Postfix
       2.3  and  later  smtp_tls_per_site   is   strongly   discouraged:   use
       smtp_tls_policy_maps instead.

       Use  of  the bare hostname as the per-site table lookup key is discour-
       aged. Always use the full destination nexthop (enclosed in  []  with  a
       possible  ":port"  suffix).  A recipient domain or MX-enabled transport
       next-hop with no port suffix may look like  a  bare  hostname,  but  is
       still a suitable destination.

       Specify  a  next-hop  destination  or  server hostname on the left-hand
       side; no wildcards are allowed. The next-hop destination is either  the
       recipient  domain, or the destination specified with a transport(5) ta-
       ble, the relayhost parameter, or the relay_transport parameter.  On the
       right hand side specify one of the following keywords:

       NONE   Don't  use TLS at all. This overrides a less specific MAY lookup
              result from the alternate host or next-hop lookup key, and over-
              rides    the    global   smtp_use_tls,   smtp_enforce_tls,   and
              smtp_tls_enforce_peername settings.

       MAY    Try to use TLS if the server announces  support,  otherwise  use
              the unencrypted connection. This has less precedence than a more
              specific result (including NONE)  from  the  alternate  host  or
              next-hop  lookup key, and has less precedence than the more spe-
              cific global "smtp_enforce_tls = yes" or "smtp_tls_enforce_peer-
              name = yes".

       MUST_NOPEERMATCH
              Require  TLS encryption, but do not require that the remote SMTP
              server hostname matches  the  information  in  the  remote  SMTP
              server certificate, or that the server certificate was issued by
              a trusted CA. This overrides a less secure NONE or a  less  spe-
              cific  MAY  lookup  result  from  the alternate host or next-hop
              lookup   key,   and   overrides   the    global    smtp_use_tls,
              smtp_enforce_tls and smtp_tls_enforce_peername settings.

       MUST   Require  TLS  encryption,  require  that  the remote SMTP server
              hostname matches the information in the remote SMTP server  cer-
              tificate,  and  require  that the remote SMTP server certificate
              was issued by a trusted CA. This overrides a  less  secure  NONE
              and  MUST_NOPEERMATCH  or a less specific MAY lookup result from
              the alternate host or next-hop lookup  key,  and  overrides  the
              global smtp_use_tls, smtp_enforce_tls and smtp_tls_enforce_peer-
              name settings.

       The above keywords correspond to the "none", "may", "encrypt" and "ver-
       ify"  security  levels  for  the  new smtp_tls_security_level parameter
       introduced in Postfix 2.3. Starting with Postfix 2.3, and independently
       of  how  the  policy  is  specified, the smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers and
       smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols parameters only apply when TLS  encryption
       is  mandatory.  Connections for which encryption is optional enable all
       "export" grade and better ciphers.

       As long as no secure DNS lookup mechanism is available, false hostnames
       in  MX  or  CNAME responses can change the server hostname that Postfix
       uses for TLS policy lookup and server  certificate  verification.  Even
       with  a  perfect  match between the server hostname and the server cer-
       tificate, there is no guarantee that Postfix is connected to the  right
       server.   See TLS_README (Closing a DNS loophole with obsolete per-site
       TLS policies) for a possible work-around.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.  With  Postfix  2.3
       and later use smtp_tls_policy_maps instead.

smtp_tls_policy_maps (default: empty)
       Optional lookup tables with the Postfix SMTP client TLS security policy
       by next-hop destination; when a  non-empty  value  is  specified,  this
       overrides the obsolete smtp_tls_per_site parameter.  See TLS_README for
       a more detailed discussion of TLS security levels.

       The TLS policy table is indexed by the full next-hop destination, which
       is  either  the recipient domain, or the verbatim next-hop specified in
       the    transport    table,    $local_transport,     $virtual_transport,
       $relay_transport  or  $default_transport.  This  includes any enclosing
       square brackets and any non-default destination server port suffix. The
       LMTP  socket type prefix (inet: or unix:) is not included in the lookup
       key.

       Only the next-hop domain, or $myhostname  with  LMTP  over  UNIX-domain
       sockets,  is used as the nexthop name for certificate verification. The
       port and any enclosing square brackets are used  in  the  table  lookup
       key, but are not used for server name verification.

       When  the lookup key is a domain name without enclosing square brackets
       or any :port suffix (typically the  recipient  domain),  and  the  full
       domain  is not found in the table, just as with the transport(5) table,
       the parent domain starting with a leading "." is  matched  recursively.
       This allows one to specify a security policy for a recipient domain and
       all its sub-domains.

       The lookup result is a security level, followed by an optional list  of
       whitespace  and/or  comma separated name=value attributes that override
       related main.cf settings. The TLS security levels in order of  increas-
       ing security are:

       none   No TLS. No additional attributes are supported at this level.

       may    Opportunistic  TLS.  No  additional  attributes are supported at
              this level. Since sending in the clear is acceptable,  demanding
              stronger  than  default  TLS  security parameters merely reduces
              inter-operability.    Postfix   2.3   and   later   ignore   the
              smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers    and   smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols
              parameters at this security level; all protocols are allowed and
              "export"  grade or better ciphers are used.  When TLS handshakes
              fail, the connection is retried with TLS disabled.  This  allows
              mail  delivery  to  sites with non-interoperable TLS implementa-
              tions.

       encrypt
              Mandatory TLS encryption. At this level and higher the  optional
              "ciphers"   attribute   overrides  the  main.cf  smtp_tls_manda-
              tory_ciphers parameter  and  the  optional  "protocols"  keyword
              overrides  the  main.cf  smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols parameter.
              In the policy table, multiple protocols  must  be  separated  by
              colons,  as  attribute values may not contain whitespace or com-
              mas.

       fingerprint
              Certificate fingerprint verification. Available with Postfix 2.5
              and later. At this security level, there are no trusted certifi-
              cate authorities. The certificate trust chain, expiration  date,
              ...  are  not checked. Instead, the optional match attribute, or
              else  the  main.cf  smtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match   parameter,
              lists  the  valid  "fingerprints" of the server certificate. The
              digest algorithm used to calculate the fingerprint  is  selected
              by  the  smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest parameter. Multiple finger-
              prints can be combined with a "|" delimiter in  a  single  match
              attribute, or multiple match attributes can be employed. The ":"
              character is not used as a delimiter as it occurs  between  each
              pair of fingerprint (hexadecimal) digits.

       verify Mandatory  TLS  verification.   At  this  security level, DNS MX
              lookups are trusted to be secure enough, and the  name  verified
              in  the  server  certificate  is usually obtained indirectly via
              unauthenticated DNS MX lookups.  The optional "match"  attribute
              overrides  the  main.cf smtp_tls_verify_cert_match parameter. In
              the policy table, multiple match patterns and strategies must be
              separated by colons.  In practice explicit control over matching
              is more common with the "secure" policy, described below.

       secure Secure-channel TLS. At this  security  level,  DNS  MX  lookups,
              though  potentially  used  to  determine  the candidate next-hop
              gateway IP addresses, are not trusted to be  secure  enough  for
              TLS peername verification. Instead, the default name verified in
              the server certificate is obtained directly from  the  next-hop,
              or  is  explicitly  specified  via  the optional match attribute
              which overrides the main.cf  smtp_tls_secure_cert_match  parame-
              ter. In the policy table, multiple match patterns and strategies
              must be separated by colons.  The match attribute is most useful
              when multiple domains are supported by common server, the policy
              entries for additional domains specify matching  rules  for  the
              primary  domain  certificate.  While  transport  table overrides
              routing the secondary domains to the primary nexthop also  allow
              secure verification, they risk delivery to the wrong destination
              when domains change hands or are re-assigned  to  new  gateways.
              With  the  "match" attribute approach, routing is not perturbed,
              and mail is deferred if verification of a new MX host fails.

       Example:

       /etc/postfix/main.cf:
           smtp_tls_policy_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/tls_policy
           # Postfix 2.5 and later
           smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest = md5

       /etc/postfix/tls_policy:
           example.edu                 none
           example.mil                 may
           example.gov                 encrypt protocols=TLSv1
           example.com                 verify ciphers=high
           example.net                 secure
           .example.net                secure match=.example.net:example.net
           [mail.example.org]:587      secure match=nexthop
           # Postfix 2.5 and later
           [thumb.example.org]          fingerprint
            match=EC:3B:2D:B0:5B:B1:FB:6D:20:A3:9D:72:F6:8D:12:35
            match=3D:95:34:51:24:66:33:B9:D2:40:99:C0:C1:17:0B:D1

       Note: The hostname strategy if  listed  in  a  non-default  setting  of
       smtp_tls_secure_cert_match  or in the match attribute in the policy ta-
       ble can render the secure level vulnerable to DNS forgery. Do  not  use
       the hostname strategy for secure-channel configurations in environments
       where DNS security is not assured.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_scert_verifydepth (default: 9)
       The verification depth for remote SMTP server certificates. A depth  of
       1 is sufficient if the issuing CA is listed in a local CA file.

       The  default verification depth is 9 (the OpenSSL default) for compati-
       bility with earlier Postfix behavior. Prior to Postfix 2.5, the default
       value  was  5, but the limit was not actually enforced. If you have set
       this to a lower  non-default  value,  certificates  with  longer  trust
       chains  may  now fail to verify. Certificate chains with 1 or 2 CAs are
       common, deeper chains are more rare and any  number  between  5  and  9
       should suffice in practice. You can choose a lower number if, for exam-
       ple, you trust certificates directly signed by an issuing  CA  but  not
       any CAs it delegates to.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_secure_cert_match (default: nexthop, dot-nexthop)
       The  server  certificate  peername verification method for the "secure"
       TLS security level. In a  "secure"  TLS  policy  table  ($smtp_tls_pol-
       icy_maps)  entry  the optional "match" attribute overrides this main.cf
       setting.

       This parameter specifies one or more patterns or  strategies  separated
       by  commas,  whitespace  or colons.  In the policy table the only valid
       separator is the colon character.

       For  a  description  of  the  pattern  and  strategy  syntax  see   the
       smtp_tls_verify_cert_match parameter. The "hostname" strategy should be
       avoided in this context, as in the absence  of  a  secure  global  DNS,
       using  the  results  of  MX  lookups in certificate verification is not
       immune to active (man-in-the-middle) attacks on DNS.

       Sample main.cf setting:

           smtp_tls_secure_cert_match = nexthop

       Sample policy table override:

           example.net     secure match=example.com:.example.com
           .example.net    secure match=example.com:.example.com

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_security_level (default: empty)
       The default SMTP TLS security level for the Postfix SMTP client; when a
       non-empty  value  is  specified, this overrides the obsolete parameters
       smtp_use_tls, smtp_enforce_tls, and smtp_tls_enforce_peername.

       Specify one of the following security levels:

       none   TLS will not be used unless enabled  for  specific  destinations
              via smtp_tls_policy_maps.

       may    Opportunistic  TLS. TLS will be used if supported by the server.
              Since sending in the clear  is  acceptable,  demanding  stronger
              than  default TLS security parameters merely reduces inter-oper-
              ability.  Postfix  2.3  and  later  ignore  the  smtp_tls_manda-
              tory_ciphers and smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols parameters at this
              security level; all protocols are allowed and "export" grade  or
              better  ciphers are used.  When TLS handshakes fail, the connec-
              tion is retried with TLS disabled.  This allows mail delivery to
              sites with non-interoperable TLS implementations.

       encrypt
              Mandatory  TLS  encryption. Since a minimum level of security is
              intended, it reasonable to be specific about sufficiently secure
              protocol  versions  and  ciphers.  At  this  security  level and
              higher, the main.cf parameters smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols  and
              smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers specify the TLS protocols and minimum
              cipher grade which the administrator considers secure enough for
              mandatory  encrypted  sessions.  This  security  level is not an
              appropriate default for systems delivering mail to the Internet.

       fingerprint
              Certificate fingerprint verification. Available with Postfix 2.5
              and later. At this security level, there are no trusted certifi-
              cate  authorities. The certificate trust chain, expiration date,
              ...   are   not   checked.   Instead,    the    smtp_tls_finger-
              print_cert_match parameter lists the valid "fingerprints" of the
              server certificate. The digest algorithm used to  calculate  the
              fingerprint   is  selected  by  the  smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest
              parameter.

       verify Mandatory TLS verification.  At  this  security  level,  DNS  MX
              lookups  are  trusted to be secure enough, and the name verified
              in the server certificate is  usually  obtained  indirectly  via
              unauthenticated  DNS  MX lookups. The smtp_tls_verify_cert_match
              parameter controls how the server name is verified. In  practice
              explicit  control  over  matching is more common at the "secure"
              level, described below. This security level is not an  appropri-
              ate default for systems delivering mail to the Internet.

       secure Secure-channel  TLS.   At  this  security level, DNS MX lookups,
              though potentially used  to  determine  the  candidate  next-hop
              gateway  IP  addresses,  are not trusted to be secure enough for
              TLS peername verification. Instead, the default name verified in
              the  server  certificate is obtained from the next-hop domain as
              specified in the smtp_tls_secure_cert_match configuration param-
              eter.  The  default  matching  rule is that a server certificate
              matches when its name is equal to or is a sub-domain of the nex-
              thop  domain.  This security level is not an appropriate default
              for systems delivering mail to the Internet.

       Examples:

       # No TLS. Formerly: smtp_use_tls=no and smtp_enforce_tls=no.
       smtp_tls_security_level = none

       # Opportunistic TLS.
       smtp_tls_security_level = may

       # Mandatory (high-grade) TLS encryption.
       smtp_tls_security_level = encrypt
       smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers = high

       # Mandatory TLS verification of hostname or nexthop domain.
       smtp_tls_security_level = verify
       smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers = high
       smtp_tls_verify_cert_match = hostname, nexthop, dot-nexthop

       # Secure channel TLS with exact nexthop name match.
       smtp_tls_security_level = secure
       smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = TLSv1
       smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers = high
       smtp_tls_secure_cert_match = nexthop

       # Certificate fingerprint verification (Postfix >= 2.5).
       # The CA-less "fingerprint" security level only scales to a limited
       # number of destinations. As a global default rather than a per-site
       # setting, this is practical when mail for all recipients is sent
       # to a central mail hub.
       relayhost = [mailhub.example.com]
       smtp_tls_security_level = fingerprint
       smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3
       smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers = high
       smtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match =
           3D:95:34:51:24:66:33:B9:D2:40:99:C0:C1:17:0B:D1
           EC:3B:2D:B0:5B:B1:FB:6D:20:A3:9D:72:F6:8D:12:35

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_session_cache_database (default: empty)
       Name of the file containing the optional Postfix SMTP client  TLS  ses-
       sion  cache. Specify a database type that supports enumeration, such as
       btree or sdbm; there is no need to support concurrent access.  The file
       is  created  if it does not exist. The smtp(8) daemon does not use this
       parameter directly, rather the cache is implemented indirectly  in  the
       tlsmgr(8) daemon. This means that per-smtp-instance master.cf overrides
       of this parameter are not effective.  Note,  that  each  of  the  cache
       databases supported by tlsmgr(8) daemon: $smtpd_tls_session_cache_data-
       base, $smtp_tls_session_cache_database (and with Postfix 2.3 and  later
       $lmtp_tls_session_cache_database), needs to be stored separately. It is
       not at this time possible to store multiple caches in  a  single  data-
       base.

       Note:  dbm  databases  are  not  suitable.  TLS session objects are too
       large.

       As of version 2.5, Postfix no longer uses root privileges when  opening
       this  file.  The  file  should  now  be  stored under the Postfix-owned
       data_directory. As a migration aid, an attempt to open the file under a
       non-Postfix  directory  is  redirected to the Postfix-owned data_direc-
       tory, and a warning is logged.

       Example:

       smtp_tls_session_cache_database = btree:/var/db/postfix/smtp_scache

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_session_cache_timeout (default: 3600s)
       The expiration time of Postfix SMTP client TLS session  cache  informa-
       tion.   A  cache cleanup is performed periodically every $smtp_tls_ses-
       sion_cache_timeout seconds. As  with  $smtp_tls_session_cache_database,
       this  parameter  is  implemented  in the tlsmgr(8) daemon and therefore
       per-smtp-instance master.cf overrides are not possible.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_verify_cert_match (default: hostname)
       The server certificate peername verification method  for  the  "verify"
       TLS  security  level.  In  a  "verify" TLS policy table ($smtp_tls_pol-
       icy_maps) entry the optional "match" attribute overrides  this  main.cf
       setting.

       This  parameter  specifies one or more patterns or strategies separated
       by commas, whitespace or colons.  In the policy table  the  only  valid
       separator is the colon character.

       Patterns specify domain names, or domain name suffixes:

       example.com
              Match  the  example.com domain, i.e. one of the names the server
              certificate must be example.com, upper and lower  case  distinc-
              tions are ignored.

       .example.com
              Match subdomains of the example.com domain, i.e. match a name in
              the server certificate that consists of  a  non-zero  number  of
              labels  followed by a .example.com suffix. Case distinctions are
              ignored.

       Strategies specify a transformation from the  next-hop  domain  to  the
       expected name in the server certificate:

       nexthop
              Match against the next-hop domain, which is either the recipient
              domain, or the transport  next-hop  configured  for  the  domain
              stripped  of  any  optional socket type prefix, enclosing square
              brackets and trailing port. When MX lookups are not  suppressed,
              this  is the original nexthop domain prior to the MX lookup, not
              the result of the MX lookup. For LMTP delivery  via  UNIX-domain
              sockets, the verified next-hop name is $myhostname.  This strat-
              egy is suitable for  use  with  the  "secure"  policy.  Case  is
              ignored.

       dot-nexthop
              As above, but match server certificate names that are subdomains
              of the next-hop domain. Case is ignored.

       hostname
              Match against the hostname of the server, often obtained via  an
              unauthenticated DNS MX lookup. For LMTP delivery via UNIX-domain
              sockets, the verified name is $myhostname. This matches the ver-
              ification  strategy  of  the  "MUST"  keyword  in  the  obsolete
              smtp_tls_per_site table, and is suitable for use with the  "ver-
              ify"  security  level.  When  the  next-hop  name is enclosed in
              square brackets to suppress MX lookups, the "hostname"  strategy
              is the same as the "nexthop" strategy. Case is ignored.

       Sample main.cf setting:

       smtp_tls_verify_cert_match = hostname, nexthop, dot-nexthop

       Sample policy table override:

       example.com     verify  match=hostname:nexthop
       .example.com    verify  match=example.com:.example.com:hostname

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_use_tls (default: no)
       Opportunistic  mode: use TLS when a remote SMTP server announces START-
       TLS support, otherwise send the mail in the clear.  Beware:  some  SMTP
       servers  offer  STARTTLS  even if it is not configured.  With Postfix <
       2.3, if the TLS handshake fails, and  no  other  server  is  available,
       delivery  is deferred and mail stays in the queue. If this is a concern
       for you, use the smtp_tls_per_site feature instead.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.  With  Postfix  2.3
       and later use smtp_tls_security_level instead.

smtp_xforward_timeout (default: 300s)
       The  SMTP  client  time limit for sending the XFORWARD command, and for
       receiving the server response.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_authorized_verp_clients (default: $authorized_verp_clients)
       What  SMTP clients are allowed to specify the XVERP command.  This com-
       mand requests that mail be delivered one recipient at a time with a per
       recipient return address.

       By default, no clients are allowed to specify XVERP.

       This  parameter was renamed with Postfix version 2.1. The default value
       is backwards compatible with Postfix version 2.0.

       Specify a list of network/netmask patterns, separated by commas  and/or
       whitespace.  The  mask specifies the number of bits in the network part
       of a host address. You can also specify hostnames or .domain names (the
       initial   dot   causes   the  domain  to  match  any  name  below  it),
       "/file/name" or  "type:table"  patterns.   A  "/file/name"  pattern  is
       replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup table is matched when a
       table entry matches a lookup string (the  lookup  result  is  ignored).
       Continue  long lines by starting the next line with whitespace. Specify
       "!pattern" to exclude an address or network block from  the  list.  The
       form  "!/file/name" is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

       Note: IP version 6 address information must be specified inside  []  in
       the  smtpd_authorized_verp_clients  value,  and in files specified with
       "/file/name".  IP version 6 addresses contain the  ":"  character,  and
       would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

smtpd_authorized_xclient_hosts (default: empty)
       What SMTP clients are allowed to use the XCLIENT feature.  This command
       overrides SMTP client information that is used for access control. Typ-
       ical use is for SMTP-based content filters, fetchmail-like programs, or
       SMTP server access rule testing. See the  XCLIENT_README  document  for
       details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       By default, no clients are allowed to specify XCLIENT.

       Specify  a list of network/netmask patterns, separated by commas and/or
       whitespace. The mask specifies the number of bits in the  network  part
       of a host address. You can also specify hostnames or .domain names (the
       initial  dot  causes  the  domain  to  match  any   name   below   it),
       "/file/name"  or  "type:table"  patterns.   A  "/file/name"  pattern is
       replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup table is matched when a
       table  entry  matches  a  lookup string (the lookup result is ignored).
       Continue long lines by starting the next line with whitespace.  Specify
       "!pattern"  to  exclude  an address or network block from the list. The
       form "!/file/name" is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and  later.

       Note:  IP  version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
       the smtpd_authorized_xclient_hosts value, and in files  specified  with
       "/file/name".   IP  version  6 addresses contain the ":" character, and
       would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

smtpd_authorized_xforward_hosts (default: empty)
       What SMTP clients are allowed to use the XFORWARD feature.   This  com-
       mand  forwards  information that is used to improve logging after SMTP-
       based content filters. See the XFORWARD_README document for details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       By default, no clients are allowed to specify XFORWARD.

       Specify a list of network/netmask patterns, separated by commas  and/or
       whitespace.  The  mask specifies the number of bits in the network part
       of a host address. You can also specify hostnames or .domain names (the
       initial   dot   causes   the  domain  to  match  any  name  below  it),
       "/file/name" or  "type:table"  patterns.   A  "/file/name"  pattern  is
       replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup table is matched when a
       table entry matches a lookup string (the  lookup  result  is  ignored).
       Continue  long lines by starting the next line with whitespace. Specify
       "!pattern" to exclude an address or network block from  the  list.  The
       form  "!/file/name" is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

       Note: IP version 6 address information must be specified inside  []  in
       the  smtpd_authorized_xforward_hosts value, and in files specified with
       "/file/name".  IP version 6 addresses contain the  ":"  character,  and
       would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

smtpd_banner (default: $myhostname ESMTP $mail_name)
       The  text that follows the 220 status code in the SMTP greeting banner.
       Some people like to see the mail version advertised. By default,  Post-
       fix shows no version.

       You MUST specify $myhostname at the start of the text. This is required
       by the SMTP protocol.

       Example:

       smtpd_banner = $myhostname ESMTP $mail_name ($mail_version)

smtpd_client_connection_count_limit (default: 50)
       How many simultaneous connections any client is allowed to make to this
       service.   By  default,  the  limit  is set to half the default process
       limit value.

       To disable this feature, specify a limit of 0.

       WARNING: The purpose of this feature is to limit abuse. It must not  be
       used to regulate legitimate mail traffic.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_client_connection_rate_limit (default: 0)
       The maximal number of connection attempts any client is allowed to make
       to this service per time unit.  The time unit  is  specified  with  the
       anvil_rate_time_unit configuration parameter.

       By  default,  a  client  can  make as many connections per time unit as
       Postfix can accept.

       To disable this feature, specify a limit of 0.

       WARNING: The purpose of this feature is to limit abuse. It must not  be
       used to regulate legitimate mail traffic.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

       Example:

       smtpd_client_connection_rate_limit = 1000

smtpd_client_event_limit_exceptions (default: $mynetworks)
       Clients  that  are  excluded from connection count, connection rate, or
       SMTP request rate restrictions. See the mynetworks  parameter  descrip-
       tion for the parameter value syntax.

       By default, clients in trusted networks are excluded. Specify a list of
       network blocks, hostnames or .domain names (the initial dot causes  the
       domain to match any name below it).

       Note:  IP  version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
       the smtpd_client_event_limit_exceptions value, and in  files  specified
       with  "/file/name".   IP version 6 addresses contain the ":" character,
       and would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_client_message_rate_limit (default: 0)
       The maximal number of message delivery  requests  that  any  client  is
       allowed to make to this service per time unit, regardless of whether or
       not Postfix actually accepts those messages.  The time unit  is  speci-
       fied with the anvil_rate_time_unit configuration parameter.

       By  default,  a  client  can send as many message delivery requests per
       time unit as Postfix can accept.

       To disable this feature, specify a limit of 0.

       WARNING: The purpose of this feature is to limit abuse. It must not  be
       used to regulate legitimate mail traffic.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

       Example:

       smtpd_client_message_rate_limit = 1000

smtpd_client_new_tls_session_rate_limit (default: 0)
       The  maximal  number of new (i.e., uncached) TLS sessions that a remote
       SMTP client is allowed to negotiate with this service  per  time  unit.
       The  time unit is specified with the anvil_rate_time_unit configuration
       parameter.

       By default, a remote SMTP client can negotiate as many new TLS sessions
       per time unit as Postfix can accept.

       To  disable  this  feature,  specify a limit of 0. Otherwise, specify a
       limit that is at least the per-client concurrent session limit, or else
       legitimate client sessions may be rejected.

       WARNING:  The purpose of this feature is to limit abuse. It must not be
       used to regulate legitimate mail traffic.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

       Example:

       smtpd_client_new_tls_session_rate_limit = 100

smtpd_client_port_logging (default: no)
       Enable logging of the remote SMTP client port in addition to the  host-
       name and IP address. The logging format is "host[address]:port".

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtpd_client_recipient_rate_limit (default: 0)
       The maximal number of recipient addresses that any client is allowed to
       send to this service per time unit, regardless of whether or not  Post-
       fix actually accepts those recipients.  The time unit is specified with
       the anvil_rate_time_unit configuration parameter.

       By default, a client can make as many recipient addresses per time unit
       as Postfix can accept.

       To disable this feature, specify a limit of 0.

       WARNING:  The purpose of this feature is to limit abuse. It must not be
       used to regulate legitimate mail traffic.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

       Example:

       smtpd_client_recipient_rate_limit = 1000

smtpd_client_restrictions (default: empty)
       Optional SMTP server access restrictions in the  context  of  a  client
       SMTP connection request.

       The default is to allow all connection requests.

       Specify  a list of restrictions, separated by commas and/or whitespace.
       Continue  long  lines  by  starting  the  next  line  with  whitespace.
       Restrictions  are applied in the order as specified; the first restric-
       tion that matches wins.

       The following restrictions are specific to client  hostname  or  client
       network address information.

       check_ccert_access type:table
              Use  the  client  certificate  fingerprint as lookup key for the
              specified access(5) database; with  Postfix  version  2.2,  also
              require  that  the  SMTP client certificate is verified success-
              fully.  The fingerprint digest algorithm is configurable via the
              smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest  parameter (hard-coded as md5 prior
              to Postfix version 2.5).  This feature is available with Postfix
              version 2.2 and later.

       check_client_access type:table
              Search  the  specified  access database for the client hostname,
              parent domains, client  IP  address,  or  networks  obtained  by
              stripping  least  significant  octets.  See the access(5) manual
              page for details.

       permit_inet_interfaces
              Permit  the  request  when  the  client   IP   address   matches
              $inet_interfaces.

       permit_mynetworks
              Permit  the  request when the client IP address matches any net-
              work or network address listed in  $mynetworks.

       permit_sasl_authenticated
              Permit the request when the client is successfully authenticated
              via the RFC 4954 (AUTH) protocol.

       permit_tls_all_clientcerts
              Permit  the  request  when the remote SMTP client certificate is
              verified successfully.  This option must be used only if a  spe-
              cial  CA  issues  the certificates and only this CA is listed as
              trusted CA, otherwise all clients with a recognized  certificate
              would  be allowed to relay. This feature is available with Post-
              fix version 2.2.

       permit_tls_clientcerts
              Permit the request when the remote SMTP client certificate  fin-
              gerprint  is  listed  in  $relay_clientcerts.   The  fingerprint
              digest  algorithm  is  configurable  via  the  smtpd_tls_finger-
              print_digest  parameter (hard-coded as md5 prior to Postfix ver-
              sion 2.5).  This feature is available with Postfix version  2.2.

       reject_rbl_client rbl_domain=d.d.d.d
              Reject  the  request when the reversed client network address is
              listed with the A record  "d.d.d.d"  under  rbl_domain  (Postfix
              version  2.1  and  later  only).  If no "=d.d.d.d" is specified,
              reject the request when the reversed client network  address  is
              listed with any A record under rbl_domain.
              The  maps_rbl_reject_code  parameter specifies the response code
              for rejected requests  (default:   554),  the  default_rbl_reply
              parameter   specifies   the   default   server  reply,  and  the
              rbl_reply_maps  parameter specifies tables with  server  replies
              indexed by rbl_domain.  This feature is available in Postfix 2.0
              and later.

       reject_rhsbl_client rbl_domain=d.d.d.d
              Reject the request when the client hostname is listed with the A
              record "d.d.d.d" under rbl_domain (Postfix version 2.1 and later
              only).  If no "=d.d.d.d" is specified, reject the  request  when
              the   client   hostname  is  listed  with  any  A  record  under
              rbl_domain. See  the  reject_rbl_client  description  above  for
              additional  RBL  related configuration parameters.  This feature
              is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

       reject_unknown_client_hostname      (with      Postfix      <      2.3:
       reject_unknown_client)
              Reject the request when 1) the client IP  address->name  mapping
              fails,   2)   the   name->address   mapping  fails,  or  3)  the
              name->address mapping does not match the client IP address.
              This     is     a     stronger     restriction     than      the
              reject_unknown_reverse_client_hostname  feature,  which triggers
              only under condition 1) above.
              The unknown_client_reject_code parameter specifies the  response
              code  for  rejected requests (default: 450). The reply is always
              450 in case the address->name or name->address lookup failed due
              to a temporary problem.

       reject_unknown_reverse_client_hostname
              Reject   the   request   when  the  client  IP  address  has  no
              address->name mapping.
              This     is     a     weaker      restriction      than      the
              reject_unknown_client_hostname  feature, which requires not only
              that the address->name and  name->address  mappings  exist,  but
              also that the two mappings reproduce the client IP address.
              The  unknown_client_reject_code parameter specifies the response
              code for rejected requests (default: 450).  The reply is  always
              450  in  case the address->name lookup failed due to a temporary
              problem.
              This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

       In addition, you can use any of  the  following  generic  restrictions.
       These restrictions are applicable in any SMTP command context.

       check_policy_service servername
              Query  the  specified policy server. See the SMTPD_POLICY_README
              document for details. This feature is available in  Postfix  2.1
              and later.

       defer  Defer  the  request. The client is told to try again later. This
              restriction is useful at the end of a restriction list, to  make
              the default policy explicit.
              The  defer_code  parameter  specifies the SMTP server reply code
              (default: 450).

       defer_if_permit
              Defer the request if some later restriction would result  in  an
              explicit  or  implicit  PERMIT  action.   This  is useful when a
              blacklisting feature fails due to  a  temporary  problem.   This
              feature is available in Postfix version 2.1 and later.

       defer_if_reject
              Defer  the  request  if some later restriction would result in a
              REJECT action.  This is useful when a whitelisting feature fails
              due  to a temporary problem.  This feature is available in Post-
              fix version 2.1 and later.

       permit Permit the request. This restriction is useful at the end  of  a
              restriction list, to make the default policy explicit.

       reject_multi_recipient_bounce
              Reject the request when the envelope sender is the null address,
              and the message has multiple envelope recipients. This usage has
              rare  but  legitimate  applications:  under  certain conditions,
              multi-recipient  mail  that  was  posted  with  the  DSN  option
              NOTIFY=NEVER may be forwarded with the null sender address.
               Note:  this  restriction  can  only  work reliably when used in
              smtpd_data_restrictions    or    smtpd_end_of_data_restrictions,
              because  the  total number of recipients is not known at an ear-
              lier stage of the SMTP conversation.  Use at the RCPT stage will
              only reject the second etc.  recipient.
              The  multi_recipient_bounce_reject_code  parameter specifies the
              response code for rejected requests (default:  550).  This  fea-
              ture is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       reject_plaintext_session
              Reject  the  request  when the connection is not encrypted. This
              restriction should not be used  before  the  client  has  had  a
              chance  to  negotiate  encryption with the AUTH or STARTTLS com-
              mands.
              The plaintext_reject_code parameter specifies the response  code
              for  rejected  requests (default:  450).  This feature is avail-
              able in Postfix 2.3 and later.

       reject_unauth_pipelining
              Reject the request when the client sends SMTP commands ahead  of
              time where it is not allowed, or when the client sends SMTP com-
              mands ahead of time without knowing that Postfix  actually  sup-
              ports  ESMTP  command pipelining. This stops mail from bulk mail
              software that improperly uses ESMTP command pipelining in  order
              to speed up deliveries.
              Note:    reject_unauth_pipelining    is   not   useful   outside
              smtpd_data_restrictions when 1)  the  client  uses  ESMTP  (EHLO
              instead  of  HELO)  and  2) with "smtpd_delay_reject = yes" (the
              default).  The use  of  reject_unauth_pipelining  in  the  other
              restriction contexts is therefore not recommended.

       reject Reject  the  request. This restriction is useful at the end of a
              restriction list, to make  the  default  policy  explicit.   The
              reject_code  configuration parameter specifies the response code
              to rejected requests (default: 554).

       sleep seconds
              Pause for the specified number of seconds and proceed  with  the
              next  restriction in the list, if any. This may stop zombie mail
              when used as:
              /etc/postfix/main.cf:
                  smtpd_client_restrictions =
                      sleep 1, reject_unauth_pipelining
                  smtpd_delay_reject = no
              This feature is available in Postfix 2.3.

       warn_if_reject
              Change the meaning of the next restriction, so that  it  logs  a
              warning instead of rejecting a request (look for logfile records
              that contain "reject_warning"). This is useful for  testing  new
              restrictions in a "live" environment without risking unnecessary
              loss of mail.

       Other restrictions that are valid in this context:

       o      SMTP command specific restrictions that are described under  the
              smtpd_helo_restrictions,       smtpd_sender_restrictions      or
              smtpd_recipient_restrictions parameters. When  helo,  sender  or
              recipient  restrictions  are  listed under smtpd_client_restric-
              tions, they have effect only with "smtpd_delay_reject = yes", so
              that  $smtpd_client_restrictions is evaluated at the time of the
              RCPT TO command.

       Example:

       smtpd_client_restrictions = permit_mynetworks, reject_unknown_client_hostname

smtpd_data_restrictions (default: empty)
       Optional access restrictions that the Postfix SMTP  server  applies  in
       the context of the SMTP DATA command.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

       Specify  a list of restrictions, separated by commas and/or whitespace.
       Continue  long  lines  by  starting  the  next  line  with  whitespace.
       Restrictions  are applied in the order as specified; the first restric-
       tion that matches wins.

       The following restrictions are valid in this context:

       o      Generic restrictions that can be used in any SMTP  command  con-
              text, described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

       o      SMTP    command    specific    restrictions    described   under
              smtpd_client_restrictions,              smtpd_helo_restrictions,
              smtpd_sender_restrictions or smtpd_recipient_restrictions.

       Examples:

       smtpd_data_restrictions = reject_unauth_pipelining
       smtpd_data_restrictions = reject_multi_recipient_bounce

smtpd_delay_open_until_valid_rcpt (default: yes)
       Postpone  the  start  of an SMTP mail transaction until a valid RCPT TO
       command is received. Specify "no" to create a mail transaction as  soon
       as the SMTP server receives a valid MAIL FROM command.

       With  sites  that  reject lots of mail, the default setting reduces the
       use of disk, CPU and memory resources. The downside  is  that  rejected
       recipients  are  logged  with NOQUEUE instead of a mail transaction ID.
       This complicates the logfile analysis of multi-recipient mail.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_delay_reject (default: yes)
       Wait until the RCPT TO command before evaluating $smtpd_client_restric-
       tions, $smtpd_helo_restrictions and $smtpd_sender_restrictions, or wait
       until the ETRN command before evaluating $smtpd_client_restrictions and
       $smtpd_helo_restrictions.

       This  feature  is  turned on by default because some clients apparently
       mis-behave when the Postfix SMTP server rejects  commands  before  RCPT
       TO.

       The  default  setting  has  one major benefit: it allows Postfix to log
       recipient address information when rejecting a client  name/address  or
       sender  address, so that it is possible to find out whose mail is being
       rejected.

smtpd_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps (default: empty)
       Lookup tables, indexed by the remote SMTP  client  address,  with  case
       insensitive  lists  of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth, etc.)
       that the SMTP server will not send in the EHLO  response  to  a  remote
       SMTP client. See smtpd_discard_ehlo_keywords for details.  The table is
       not searched by hostname for robustness reasons.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_discard_ehlo_keywords (default: empty)
       A case insensitive list of EHLO keywords (pipelining,  starttls,  auth,
       etc.)  that  the  SMTP  server  will not send in the EHLO response to a
       remote SMTP client.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

       Notes:

       o      Specify the silent-discard pseudo keyword to prevent this action
              from being logged.

       o      Use  the smtpd_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps feature to dis-
              card EHLO keywords selectively.

smtpd_end_of_data_restrictions (default: empty)
       Optional access restrictions that the Postfix SMTP  server  applies  in
       the context of the SMTP END-OF-DATA command.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

       See smtpd_data_restrictions for syntax details.

smtpd_enforce_tls (default: no)
       Mandatory  TLS:  announce STARTTLS support to SMTP clients, and require
       that clients use TLS encryption.  According to RFC 2487 this  MUST  NOT
       be  applied  in case of a publicly-referenced SMTP server.  This option
       is off by default and should be used only on dedicated servers.

       Note 1: "smtpd_enforce_tls = yes" implies "smtpd_tls_auth_only =  yes".

       Note  2:  when  invoked  via  "sendmail  -bs", Postfix will never offer
       STARTTLS due to insufficient privileges to access  the  server  private
       key. This is intended behavior.

       This  feature  is  available in Postfix 2.2 and later. With Postfix 2.3
       and later use smtpd_tls_security_level instead.

smtpd_error_sleep_time (default: 1s)
       With Postfix version 2.1 and later:  the  SMTP  server  response  delay
       after  a  client has made more than $smtpd_soft_error_limit errors, and
       fewer than $smtpd_hard_error_limit errors, without delivering mail.

       With Postfix version 2.0 and earlier:  the  SMTP  server  delay  before
       sending  a reject (4xx or 5xx) response, when the client has made fewer
       than $smtpd_soft_error_limit errors without delivering mail.

smtpd_etrn_restrictions (default: empty)
       Optional SMTP server access restrictions in the  context  of  a  client
       ETRN request.

       The Postfix ETRN implementation accepts only destinations that are eli-
       gible for the Postfix "fast flush" service. See  the  ETRN_README  file
       for details.

       Specify  a list of restrictions, separated by commas and/or whitespace.
       Continue  long  lines  by  starting  the  next  line  with  whitespace.
       Restrictions  are applied in the order as specified; the first restric-
       tion that matches wins.

       The following restrictions are specific to the domain name  information
       received with the ETRN command.

       check_etrn_access type:table
              Search the specified access database for the ETRN domain name or
              its parent domains. See the access(5) manual page for details.

       Other restrictions that are valid in this context:

       o      Generic restrictions that can be used in any SMTP  command  con-
              text, described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

       o      SMTP    command    specific    restrictions    described   under
              smtpd_client_restrictions and smtpd_helo_restrictions.

       Example:

       smtpd_etrn_restrictions = permit_mynetworks, reject

smtpd_expansion_filter (default: see postconf -d output)
       What characters are allowed in $name expansions of RBL reply templates.
       Characters  not  in  the  allowed  set are replaced by "_".  Use C like
       escapes to specify special characters such as whitespace.

       This parameter is not subjected to $parameter expansion.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

smtpd_forbidden_commands (default: CONNECT, GET, POST)
       List of commands that causes the Postfix  SMTP  server  to  immediately
       terminate  the  session with a 221 code. This can be used to disconnect
       clients that obviously attempt to abuse the system. In addition to  the
       commands  listed  in  this parameter, commands that follow the "Label:"
       format of message headers will also cause a disconnect.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_hard_error_limit (default: 20)
       The maximal number of errors a remote SMTP client is  allowed  to  make
       without  delivering  mail. The Postfix SMTP server disconnects when the
       limit is exceeded.

smtpd_helo_required (default: no)
       Require that a remote SMTP client introduces itself at the beginning of
       an SMTP session with the HELO or EHLO command.

       Example:

       smtpd_helo_required = yes

smtpd_helo_restrictions (default: empty)
       Optional  restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the con-
       text of the SMTP HELO command.

       The default is to permit everything.

       Specify a list of restrictions, separated by commas and/or  whitespace.
       Continue  long  lines  by  starting  the  next  line  with  whitespace.
       Restrictions are applied in the order as specified; the first  restric-
       tion that matches wins.

       The  following  restrictions  are  specific to the hostname information
       received with the HELO or EHLO command.

       check_helo_access type:table
              Search the specified access(5) database for  the  HELO  or  EHLO
              hostname  or  parent  domains,  and  execute  the  corresponding
              action.

       check_helo_mx_access type:table
              Search the specified access(5) database for the MX hosts for the
              HELO  or  EHLO  hostname,  and execute the corresponding action.
              Note: a result of  "OK"  is  not  allowed  for  safety  reasons.
              Instead,  use  DUNNO  in  order  to  exclude specific hosts from
              blacklists.  This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       check_helo_ns_access type:table
              Search  the specified access(5) database for the DNS servers for
              the HELO or EHLO hostname, and execute the corresponding action.
              Note:  a  result  of  "OK"  is  not  allowed for safety reasons.
              Instead, use DUNNO in  order  to  exclude  specific  hosts  from
              blacklists.  This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       reject_invalid_helo_hostname (with Postfix < 2.3:  reject_invalid_host-
       name)
              Reject the request when the HELO  or  EHLO  hostname  syntax  is
              invalid.
              The  invalid_hostname_reject_code specifies the response code to
              rejected requests (default: 501).

       reject_non_fqdn_helo_hostname      (with      Postfix      <       2.3:
       reject_non_fqdn_hostname)
              Reject the request when the HELO or  EHLO  hostname  is  not  in
              fully-qualified domain form, as required by the RFC.
              The  non_fqdn_reject_code  parameter specifies the response code
              to rejected requests (default: 504).

       reject_rhsbl_helo rbl_domain=d.d.d.d
              Reject the request when the HELO or EHLO  hostname  hostname  is
              listed  with  the  A  record "d.d.d.d" under rbl_domain (Postfix
              version 2.1 and later only).  If  no  "=d.d.d.d"  is  specified,
              reject the request when the HELO or EHLO hostname is listed with
              any  A  record  under  rbl_domain.  See  the   reject_rbl_client
              description for additional RBL related configuration parameters.
              This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

       reject_unknown_helo_hostname (with Postfix < 2.3:  reject_unknown_host-
       name)
              Reject the request when the HELO or EHLO hostname has no  DNS  A
              or MX record.
              The  unknown_hostname_reject_code specifies the response code to
              rejected requests (default: 450).

       Other restrictions that are valid in this context:

       o      Generic restrictions that can be used in any SMTP  command  con-
              text, described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

       o      Client   hostname   or  network  address  specific  restrictions
              described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

       o      SMTP   command    specific    restrictions    described    under
              smtpd_sender_restrictions or smtpd_recipient_restrictions.  When
              sender   or   recipient   restrictions    are    listed    under
              smtpd_helo_restrictions,    they    have    effect   only   with
              "smtpd_delay_reject = yes", so that $smtpd_helo_restrictions  is
              evaluated at the time of the RCPT TO command.

       Examples:

       smtpd_helo_restrictions = permit_mynetworks, reject_invalid_helo_hostname
       smtpd_helo_restrictions = permit_mynetworks, reject_unknown_helo_hostname

smtpd_history_flush_threshold (default: 100)
       The  maximal number of lines in the Postfix SMTP server command history
       before it is flushed upon receipt of EHLO, RSET, or end of DATA.

smtpd_junk_command_limit (default: 100)
       The number of junk commands (NOOP, VRFY, ETRN or RSET)  that  a  remote
       SMTP client can send before the Postfix SMTP server starts to increment
       the error counter with each junk command.  The junk  command  count  is
       reset after mail is delivered.  See also the smtpd_error_sleep_time and
       smtpd_soft_error_limit configuration parameters.

smtpd_milters (default: empty)
       A list of Milter (mail filter) applications for new mail  that  arrives
       via  the  Postfix  smtpd(8) server.  See the MILTER_README document for
       details.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_noop_commands (default: empty)
       List of commands that the Postfix SMTP server replies to with "250 Ok",
       without  doing any syntax checks and without changing state.  This list
       overrides any commands built into the Postfix SMTP server.

smtpd_null_access_lookup_key (default: <>)
       The lookup key to be used in SMTP access(5) tables instead of the  null
       sender address.

smtpd_peername_lookup (default: yes)
       Attempt to look up the remote SMTP client hostname, and verify that the
       name matches the client IP address. A client name is set  to  "unknown"
       when  it  cannot  be looked up or verified, or when name lookup is dis-
       abled.  Turning off name lookup reduces delays due to  DNS  lookup  and
       increases the maximal inbound delivery rate.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_policy_service_max_idle (default: 300s)
       The time after which an idle SMTPD policy service connection is closed.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_policy_service_max_ttl (default: 1000s)
       The time after which an  active  SMTPD  policy  service  connection  is
       closed.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_policy_service_timeout (default: 100s)
       The  time limit for connecting to, writing to or receiving from a dele-
       gated SMTPD policy server.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_proxy_ehlo (default: $myhostname)
       How the Postfix SMTP server announces itself to the proxy  filter.   By
       default, the Postfix hostname is used.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_proxy_filter (default: empty)
       The  hostname  and  TCP  port  of the mail filtering proxy server.  The
       proxy receives all mail from the Postfix SMTP server, and  is  supposed
       to give the result to another Postfix SMTP server process.

       Specify   "host:port"  or  "inet:host:port"  for  a  TCP  endpoint,  or
       "unix:pathname" for a UNIX-domain endpoint. The host can  be  specified
       as  an  IP address or as a symbolic name; no MX lookups are done.  When
       no "host" or "host:"  are specified,  the  local  machine  is  assumed.
       Pathname interpretation is relative to the Postfix queue directory.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       The  "inet:"  and  "unix:"  prefixes  are  available in Postfix 2.3 and
       later.

smtpd_proxy_timeout (default: 100s)
       The time limit for connecting to a proxy  filter  and  for  sending  or
       receiving  information.   When  a  connection  fails  the client gets a
       generic error message while more detailed information is logged to  the
       maillog file.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_recipient_limit (default: 1000)
       The maximal number of recipients that the Postfix SMTP  server  accepts
       per message delivery request.

smtpd_recipient_overshoot_limit (default: 1000)
       The  number  of recipients that a remote SMTP client can send in excess
       of the limit specified with $smtpd_recipient_limit, before the  Postfix
       SMTP  server  increments  the  per-session  error count for each excess
       recipient.

smtpd_recipient_restrictions (default: permit_mynetworks, reject_unauth_desti-
       nation)
       The  access  restrictions  that  the Postfix SMTP server applies in the
       context of the RCPT TO command.

       By default, the Postfix SMTP server accepts:

       o      Mail from clients whose IP address matches $mynetworks, or:

       o      Mail to remote destinations that  match  $relay_domains,  except
              for  addresses that contain sender-specified routing (user@else-
              where@domain), or:

       o      Mail  to  local  destinations  that  match  $inet_interfaces  or
              $proxy_interfaces,  $mydestination,  $virtual_alias_domains,  or
              $virtual_mailbox_domains.

       IMPORTANT: If you change this parameter setting, you  must  specify  at
       least  one of the following restrictions. Otherwise Postfix will refuse
       to receive mail:

           reject, defer, defer_if_permit, reject_unauth_destination

       Specify a list of restrictions, separated by commas and/or  whitespace.
       Continue  long  lines  by  starting  the  next  line  with  whitespace.
       Restrictions are applied in the order as specified; the first  restric-
       tion that matches wins.

       The  following  restrictions are specific to the recipient address that
       is received with the RCPT TO command.

       check_recipient_access type:table
              Search the specified access(5) database for the resolved RCPT TO
              address,  domain, parent domains, or localpart@, and execute the
              corresponding action.

       check_recipient_mx_access type:table
              Search the specified access(5) database for the MX hosts for the
              RCPT  TO address, and execute the corresponding action.  Note: a
              result of "OK" is not allowed for safety reasons.  Instead,  use
              DUNNO  in order to exclude specific hosts from blacklists.  This
              feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       check_recipient_ns_access type:table
              Search the specified access(5) database for the DNS servers  for
              the  RCPT  TO  address,  and  execute  the corresponding action.
              Note: a result of  "OK"  is  not  allowed  for  safety  reasons.
              Instead,  use  DUNNO  in  order  to  exclude specific hosts from
              blacklists.  This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       permit_auth_destination
              Permit the request when one of the following is true:

       o      Postfix  is mail forwarder: the resolved RCPT TO address matches
              $relay_domains or a subdomain thereof, and the address  contains
              no sender-specified routing (user@elsewhere@domain),

       o      Postfix  is  the final destination: the resolved RCPT TO address
              matches  $mydestination,  $inet_interfaces,   $proxy_interfaces,
              $virtual_alias_domains,  or  $virtual_mailbox_domains,  and  the
              address  contains  no   sender-specified   routing   (user@else-
              where@domain).

       permit_mx_backup
              Permit  the  request when the local mail system is backup MX for
              the RCPT TO address, or when the address is an authorized desti-
              nation (see permit_auth_destination for definition).

       o      Safety:  permit_mx_backup  does  not  accept addresses that have
              sender-specified  routing   information   (example:   user@else-
              where@domain).

       o      Safety:  permit_mx_backup  can  be  vulnerable  to  mis-use when
              access is not restricted with permit_mx_backup_networks.

       o      Safety: as of Postfix version 2.3,  permit_mx_backup  no  longer
              accepts the address when the local mail system is primary MX for
              the recipient domain.  Exception: permit_mx_backup  accepts  the
              address  when  it  specifies an authorized destination (see per-
              mit_auth_destination for definition).

       o      Limitation: mail may be rejected in  case  of  a  temporary  DNS
              lookup problem with Postfix prior to version 2.0.

       reject_non_fqdn_recipient
              Reject  the  request  when  the RCPT TO address is not in fully-
              qualified domain form, as required by the RFC.
              The non_fqdn_reject_code parameter specifies the  response  code
              to rejected requests (default: 504).

       reject_rhsbl_recipient rbl_domain=d.d.d.d
              Reject  the request when the RCPT TO domain is listed with the A
              record "d.d.d.d" under rbl_domain (Postfix version 2.1 and later
              only).   If  no "=d.d.d.d" is specified, reject the request when
              the RCPT TO domain is listed with any A record under rbl_domain.
              The  maps_rbl_reject_code  parameter specifies the response code
              for rejected  requests  (default:  554);  the  default_rbl_reply
              parameter   specifies   the   default   server  reply;  and  the
              rbl_reply_maps parameter specifies tables  with  server  replies
              indexed  by  rbl_domain.   This  feature is available in Postfix
              version 2.0 and later.

       reject_unauth_destination
              Reject the request unless one of the following is true:

       o      Postfix is mail forwarder: the resolved RCPT TO address  matches
              $relay_domains  or  a subdomain thereof, and contains no sender-
              specified routing (user@elsewhere@domain),

       o      Postfix is the final destination: the resolved RCPT  TO  address
              matches   $mydestination,  $inet_interfaces,  $proxy_interfaces,
              $virtual_alias_domains, or  $virtual_mailbox_domains,  and  con-
              tains no sender-specified routing (user@elsewhere@domain).
               The  relay_domains_reject_code parameter specifies the response
              code for rejected requests (default: 554).

       reject_unknown_recipient_domain
              Reject the request when Postfix is not final destination for the
              recipient  address,  and  the RCPT TO address has no DNS A or MX
              record, or when it has a malformed MX record such  as  a  record
              with  a zero-length MX hostname (Postfix version 2.3 and later).
              The unknown_address_reject_code parameter specifies the response
              code  for  rejected  requests  (default:  450).  The response is
              always 450 in case of a temporary DNS error.

       reject_unlisted_recipient  (with  Postfix  version  2.0:  check_recipi-
       ent_maps)
              Reject the request when the RCPT TO address is not listed in the
              list   of  valid  recipients  for  its  domain  class.  See  the
              smtpd_reject_unlisted_recipient   parameter   description    for
              details.  This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       reject_unverified_recipient
              Reject  the request when mail to the RCPT TO address is known to
              bounce, or when the recipient address destination is not  reach-
              able.   Address  verification information is managed by the ver-
              ify(8) server;  see  the  ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_README  file  for
              details.
              The  unverified_recipient_reject_code  parameter  specifies  the
              response when an address  is  known  to  bounce  (default:  450,
              change  into  550  when  you are confident that it is safe to do
              so). Postfix replies with 450 when an address probe  failed  due
              to  a  temporary  problem.  This feature is available in Postfix
              2.1 and later.

       Other restrictions that are valid in this context:

       o      Generic restrictions that can be used in any SMTP  command  con-
              text, described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

       o      SMTP    command    specific    restrictions    described   under
              smtpd_client_restrictions,      smtpd_helo_restrictions      and
              smtpd_sender_restrictions.

       Example:

       smtpd_recipient_restrictions = permit_mynetworks, reject_unauth_destination

smtpd_reject_unlisted_recipient (default: yes)
       Request that the Postfix SMTP server rejects mail for unknown recipient
       addresses,  even  when  no  explicit  reject_unlisted_recipient  access
       restriction  is specified. This prevents the Postfix queue from filling
       up with undeliverable MAILER-DAEMON messages.

       o      The recipient domain matches $mydestination, $inet_interfaces or
              $proxy_interfaces,   but   the   recipient   is  not  listed  in
              $local_recipient_maps, and $local_recipient_maps is not null.

       o      The recipient  domain  matches  $virtual_alias_domains  but  the
              recipient is not listed in $virtual_alias_maps.

       o      The  recipient  domain  matches $virtual_mailbox_domains but the
              recipient is not  listed  in  $virtual_mailbox_maps,  and  $vir-
              tual_mailbox_maps is not null.

       o      The recipient domain matches $relay_domains but the recipient is
              not listed in $relay_recipient_maps,  and  $relay_recipient_maps
              is not null.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_reject_unlisted_sender (default: no)
       Request  that  the Postfix SMTP server rejects mail from unknown sender
       addresses, even when no explicit reject_unlisted_sender access restric-
       tion  is specified. This can slow down an explosion of forged mail from
       worms or viruses.

       o      The sender domain matches  $mydestination,  $inet_interfaces  or
              $proxy_interfaces, but the sender is not listed in $local_recip-
              ient_maps, and $local_recipient_maps is not null.

       o      The sender domain matches $virtual_alias_domains but the  sender
              is not listed in $virtual_alias_maps.

       o      The  sender  domain  matches  $virtual_mailbox_domains  but  the
              sender  is  not  listed  in  $virtual_mailbox_maps,  and   $vir-
              tual_mailbox_maps is not null.

       o      The  sender  domain matches $relay_domains but the sender is not
              listed in $relay_recipient_maps,  and  $relay_recipient_maps  is
              not null.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_restriction_classes (default: empty)
       User-defined aliases for groups of access restrictions. The aliases can
       be specified in smtpd_recipient_restrictions etc., and  on  the  right-
       hand side of a Postfix access(5) table.

       One  major  application  is for implementing per-recipient UCE control.
       See the RESTRICTION_CLASS_README document for other examples.

smtpd_sasl_application_name (default: smtpd)
       The application name that the Postfix SMTP server uses for SASL  server
       initialization.  This controls the name of the SASL configuration file.
       The default value is smtpd, corresponding to a SASL configuration  file
       named smtpd.conf.

       This  feature  is available in Postfix 2.1 and 2.2. With Postfix 2.3 it
       was renamed to smtpd_sasl_path.

smtpd_sasl_auth_enable (default: no)
       Enable SASL authentication in the Postfix SMTP server. By default,  the
       Postfix SMTP server does not use authentication.

       If a remote SMTP client is authenticated, the permit_sasl_authenticated
       access restriction can be used to permit relay access, like this:

           smtpd_recipient_restrictions =
               permit_mynetworks, permit_sasl_authenticated, ...

       To reject all SMTP connections from  unauthenticated  clients,  specify
       "smtpd_delay_reject = yes" (which is the default) and use:

           smtpd_client_restrictions = permit_sasl_authenticated, reject

       See  the SASL_README file for SASL configuration and operation details.

smtpd_sasl_authenticated_header (default: no)
       Report the SASL authenticated user name in the smtpd(8)  Received  mes-
       sage header.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_sasl_exceptions_networks (default: empty)
       What  remote  SMTP  clients the Postfix SMTP server will not offer AUTH
       support to.

       Some clients (Netscape 4 at least) have  a  bug  that  causes  them  to
       require  a  login  and  password whenever AUTH is offered, whether it's
       necessary or not. To work around this, specify,  for  example,  $mynet-
       works to prevent Postfix from offering AUTH to local clients.

       Specify  a list of network/netmask patterns, separated by commas and/or
       whitespace. The mask specifies the number of bits in the  network  part
       of  a host address. You can also "/file/name" or "type:table" patterns.
       A "/file/name" pattern is replaced  by  its  contents;  a  "type:table"
       lookup table is matched when a table entry matches a lookup string (the
       lookup result is ignored).  Continue long lines by  starting  the  next
       line  with whitespace. Specify "!pattern" to exclude an address or net-
       work block from the list.  The form "!/file/name" is supported only  in
       Postfix version 2.4 and later.

       Note:  IP  version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
       the smtpd_sasl_exceptions_networks value, and in files  specified  with
       "/file/name".   IP  version  6 addresses contain the ":" character, and
       would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

       Example:

       smtpd_sasl_exceptions_networks = $mynetworks

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_sasl_local_domain (default: empty)
       The name of the Postfix SMTP server's local SASL authentication  realm.

       By default, the local authentication realm name is the null string.

       Examples:

       smtpd_sasl_local_domain = $mydomain
       smtpd_sasl_local_domain = $myhostname

smtpd_sasl_path (default: smtpd)
       Implementation-specific information that the Postfix SMTP server passes
       through to the  SASL  plug-in  implementation  that  is  selected  with
       smtpd_sasl_type.   Typically this specifies the name of a configuration
       file or rendezvous point.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later. In earlier releases
       it was called smtpd_sasl_application_name.

smtpd_sasl_security_options (default: noanonymous)
       Postfix  SMTP  server SASL security options; as of Postfix 2.3 the list
       of available features depends on the SASL server implementation that is
       selected with smtpd_sasl_type.

       The  following  security features are defined for the cyrus server SASL
       implementation:

       Restrict what authentication mechanisms the Postfix  SMTP  server  will
       offer  to  the client.  The list of available authentication mechanisms
       is system dependent.

       Specify zero or more of the following:

       noplaintext
              Disallow methods that use plaintext passwords.

       noactive
              Disallow methods subject to active (non-dictionary) attack.

       nodictionary
              Disallow methods subject to passive (dictionary) attack.

       noanonymous
              Disallow methods that allow anonymous authentication.

       forward_secrecy
              Only allow methods that support forward secrecy (Dovecot  only).

       mutual_auth
              Only  allow  methods  that  provide  mutual  authentication (not
              available with Cyrus SASL version 1).

       By default, the Postfix SMTP server accepts plaintext passwords but not
       anonymous logins.

       Warning:  it  appears  that  clients  try authentication methods in the
       order as advertised by the  server  (e.g.,  PLAIN  ANONYMOUS  CRAM-MD5)
       which  means  that if you disable plaintext passwords, clients will log
       in anonymously, even when they should be able to use CRAM-MD5.  So,  if
       you  disable  plaintext  logins, disable anonymous logins too.  Postfix
       treats anonymous login as no authentication.

       Example:

       smtpd_sasl_security_options = noanonymous, noplaintext

smtpd_sasl_tls_security_options (default: $smtpd_sasl_security_options)
       The SASL authentication security options that the Postfix  SMTP  server
       uses for TLS encrypted SMTP sessions.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_sasl_type (default: cyrus)
       The  SASL  plug-in  type  that  the  Postfix SMTP server should use for
       authentication. The available types are listed with the  "postconf  -a"
       command.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_sender_login_maps (default: empty)
       Optional  lookup  table with the SASL login names that own sender (MAIL
       FROM) addresses.

       Specify zero or more "type:table"  lookup  tables.  With  lookups  from
       indexed  files such as DB or DBM, or from networked tables such as NIS,
       LDAP or SQL, the following search operations are  done  with  a  sender
       address of user@domain:

       1) user@domain
              This table lookup is always done and has the highest precedence.

       2) user
              This table lookup is done only  when  the  domain  part  of  the
              sender  address  matches $myorigin, $mydestination, $inet_inter-
              faces or $proxy_interfaces.

       3) @domain
              This table lookup is done last and has the lowest precedence.

       In all cases the result of table lookup must be either "not found" or a
       list of SASL login names separated by comma and/or whitespace.

smtpd_sender_restrictions (default: empty)
       Optional  restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the con-
       text of the MAIL FROM command.

       The default is to permit everything.

       Specify a list of restrictions, separated by commas and/or  whitespace.
       Continue  long  lines  by  starting  the  next  line  with  whitespace.
       Restrictions are applied in the order as specified; the first  restric-
       tion that matches wins.

       The  following restrictions are specific to the sender address received
       with the MAIL FROM command.

       check_sender_access type:table
              Search the  specified  access(5)  database  for  the  MAIL  FROM
              address,  domain, parent domains, or localpart@, and execute the
              corresponding action.

       check_sender_mx_access type:table
              Search the specified access(5) database for the MX hosts for the
              MAIL  FROM address, and execute the corresponding action.  Note:
              a result of "OK" is not allowed for safety reasons. Instead, use
              DUNNO  in order to exclude specific hosts from blacklists.  This
              feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       check_sender_ns_access type:table
              Search the specified access(5) database for the DNS servers  for
              the  MAIL  FROM  address,  and execute the corresponding action.
              Note: a result of  "OK"  is  not  allowed  for  safety  reasons.
              Instead,  use  DUNNO  in  order  to  exclude specific hosts from
              blacklists.  This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       reject_authenticated_sender_login_mismatch
              Enforces   the   reject_sender_login_mismatch   restriction  for
              authenticated clients only. This feature is available in Postfix
              version 2.1 and later.

       reject_non_fqdn_sender
              Reject  the  request when the MAIL FROM address is not in fully-
              qualified domain form, as required by the RFC.
              The non_fqdn_reject_code parameter specifies the  response  code
              to rejected requests (default: 504).

       reject_rhsbl_sender rbl_domain=d.d.d.d
              Reject  the request when the MAIL FROM domain is listed with the
              A record "d.d.d.d" under rbl_domain  (Postfix  version  2.1  and
              later  only).  If no "=d.d.d.d" is specified, reject the request
              when the MAIL FROM domain is listed  with  any  A  record  under
              rbl_domain.
              The  maps_rbl_reject_code  parameter specifies the response code
              for rejected requests  (default:   554);  the  default_rbl_reply
              parameter   specifies   the   default   server  reply;  and  the
              rbl_reply_maps parameter specifies tables  with  server  replies
              indexed by rbl_domain.  This feature is available in Postfix 2.0
              and later.

       reject_sender_login_mismatch
              Reject the request when  $smtpd_sender_login_maps  specifies  an
              owner  for  the  MAIL FROM address, but the client is not (SASL)
              logged in as that MAIL FROM address owner; or when the client is
              (SASL) logged in, but the client login name doesn't own the MAIL
              FROM address according to $smtpd_sender_login_maps.

       reject_unauthenticated_sender_login_mismatch
              Enforces the reject_sender_login_mismatch restriction for  unau-
              thenticated  clients  only. This feature is available in Postfix
              version 2.1 and later.

       reject_unknown_sender_domain
              Reject the request when Postfix is not final destination for the
              sender  address,  and  the  MAIL FROM address has no DNS A or MX
              record, or when it has a malformed MX record such  as  a  record
              with  a zero-length MX hostname (Postfix version 2.3 and later).
              The unknown_address_reject_code parameter specifies the response
              code  for  rejected  requests  (default:  450).  The response is
              always 450 in case of a temporary DNS error.

       reject_unlisted_sender
              Reject the request when the MAIL FROM address is not  listed  in
              the  list  of  valid  recipients  for  its domain class. See the
              smtpd_reject_unlisted_sender parameter description for  details.
              This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

       reject_unverified_sender
              Reject  the  request when mail to the MAIL FROM address is known
              to bounce, or when the sender address destination is not  reach-
              able.   Address  verification information is managed by the ver-
              ify(8) server;  see  the  ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_README  file  for
              details.
              The   unverified_sender_reject_code   parameter   specifies  the
              response when an address  is  known  to  bounce  (default:  450,
              change  into  550  when  you are confident that it is safe to do
              so). Postfix replies with 450 when an address probe  failed  due
              to  a  temporary  problem.  This feature is available in Postfix
              2.1 and later.

       Other restrictions that are valid in this context:

       o      Generic restrictions that can be used in any SMTP  command  con-
              text, described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

       o      SMTP    command    specific    restrictions    described   under
              smtpd_client_restrictions and smtpd_helo_restrictions.

       o      SMTP command specific restrictions described under smtpd_recipi-
              ent_restrictions.  When  recipient restrictions are listed under
              smtpd_sender_restrictions,   they   have   effect   only    with
              "smtpd_delay_reject  =  yes", so that $smtpd_sender_restrictions
              is evaluated at the time of the RCPT TO command.

       Examples:

       smtpd_sender_restrictions = reject_unknown_sender_domain
       smtpd_sender_restrictions = reject_unknown_sender_domain,
           check_sender_access hash:/etc/postfix/access

smtpd_soft_error_limit (default: 10)
       The number of errors a remote SMTP client is allowed  to  make  without
       delivering  mail  before  the  Postfix  SMTP  server slows down all its
       responses.

       o      With Postfix version 2.1 and  later,  the  Postfix  SMTP  server
              delays all responses by $smtpd_error_sleep_time seconds.

       o      With  Postfix  versions 2.0 and earlier, the Postfix SMTP server
              delays all responses by (number of errors) seconds.

smtpd_starttls_timeout (default: 300s)
       The time limit for Postfix SMTP server write and read operations during
       TLS startup and shutdown handshake procedures.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_timeout (default: 300s)
       The  time  limit  for  sending  a  Postfix SMTP server response and for
       receiving a remote SMTP client request.

       Note: if you set SMTP time limits to very large values you may have  to
       update the global ipc_timeout parameter.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

smtpd_tls_CAfile (default: empty)
       The file with the certificate of the certification authority (CA)  that
       issued  the  Postfix SMTP server certificate.  This is needed only when
       the CA certificate is not already present  in  the  server  certificate
       file.   This file may also contain the CA certificates of other trusted
       CAs.  You must use this file for the list of trusted CAs if you want to
       use chroot-mode.

       Example:

       smtpd_tls_CAfile = /etc/postfix/CAcert.pem

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_CApath (default: empty)
       Directory  with  PEM format certificate authority certificates that the
       Postfix SMTP server offers to remote SMTP clients for  the  purpose  of
       client certificate verification.  Do not forget to create the necessary
       "hash" links with, for example, "$OPENSSL_HOME/bin/c_rehash  /etc/post-
       fix/certs".

       To  use  this option in chroot mode, this directory (or a copy) must be
       inside the chroot jail. Please note that in this case the  CA  certifi-
       cates  are  not  offered  to the client, so that e.g.  Netscape clients
       might not offer certificates issued by them.  Use of  this  feature  is
       therefore not recommended.

       Example:

       smtpd_tls_CApath = /etc/postfix/certs

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_always_issue_session_ids (default: yes)
       Force  the Postfix SMTP server to issue a TLS session id, even when TLS
       session caching  is  turned  off  (smtpd_tls_session_cache_database  is
       empty). This behavior is compatible with Postfix < 2.3.

       With  Postfix 2.3 and later the Postfix SMTP server can disable session
       id generation when TLS  session  caching  is  turned  off.  This  keeps
       clients  from caching sessions that almost certainly cannot be re-used.

       By default, the Postfix SMTP server always generates TLS  session  ids.
       This works around a known defect in mail client applications such as MS
       Outlook, and may also prevent interoperability issues with other  MTAs.

       Example:

       smtpd_tls_always_issue_session_ids = no

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_ask_ccert (default: no)
       Ask  a remote SMTP client for a client certificate. This information is
       needed for certificate based mail relaying with, for example, the  per-
       mit_tls_clientcerts feature.

       Some clients such as Netscape will either complain if no certificate is
       available (for the list of CAs in $smtpd_tls_CAfile) or will offer mul-
       tiple client certificates to choose from. This may be annoying, so this
       option is "off" by default.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_auth_only (default: no)
       When TLS encryption is optional in the  Postfix  SMTP  server,  do  not
       announce or accept SASL authentication over unencrypted connections.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_ccert_verifydepth (default: 9)
       The  verification depth for remote SMTP client certificates. A depth of
       1 is sufficient if the issuing CA is listed in a local CA file.

       The default verification depth is 9 (the OpenSSL default) for  compati-
       bility with earlier Postfix behavior. Prior to Postfix 2.5, the default
       value was 5, but the limit was not actually enforced. If you  have  set
       this  to  a  lower  non-default  value,  certificates with longer trust
       chains may now fail to verify. Certificate chains with 1 or 2  CAs  are
       common,  deeper  chains  are  more  rare and any number between 5 and 9
       should suffice in practice. You can choose a lower number if, for exam-
       ple,  you  trust  certificates directly signed by an issuing CA but not
       any CAs it delegates to.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_cert_file (default: empty)
       File with the Postfix SMTP server RSA certificate in PEM format.   This
       file may also contain the Postfix SMTP server private RSA key.

       Public  Internet  MX hosts without certificates signed by a "reputable"
       CA must generate, and be prepared to present to most clients,  a  self-
       signed or private-CA signed certificate. The client will not be able to
       authenticate the server, but unless it is running Postfix 2.3 or  simi-
       lar software, it will still insist on a server certificate.

       For servers that are not public Internet MX hosts, Postfix 2.3 supports
       configurations with no certificates. This entails the use of  just  the
       anonymous TLS ciphers, which are not supported by typical SMTP clients.
       Since such clients will not, as a rule, fall back to plain text after a
       TLS  handshake failure, the server will be unable to receive email from
       TLS enabled clients. To avoid accidental configurations  with  no  cer-
       tificates, Postfix 2.3 enables certificate-less operation only when the
       administrator  explicitly  sets  "smtpd_tls_cert_file  =  none".   This
       ensures  that new Postfix configurations will not accidentally run with
       no certificates.

       Both RSA and DSA certificates  are  supported.   When  both  types  are
       present, the cipher used determines which certificate will be presented
       to the client.  For Netscape and OpenSSL clients without special cipher
       choices the RSA certificate is preferred.

       In order to verify a certificate, the CA certificate (in case of a cer-
       tificate chain, all CA certificates) must be available.  You should add
       these  certificates  to  the server certificate, the server certificate
       first, then the issuing CA(s).

       Example: the certificate for "server.dom.ain" was issued by "intermedi-
       ate  CA"  which  itself  has  a  certificate  of "root CA".  Create the
       server.pem   file   with   "cat   server_cert.pem   intermediate_CA.pem
       root_CA.pem > server.pem".

       If you also want to verify client certificates issued by these CAs, you
       can add the CA certificates to the smtpd_tls_CAfile, in which  case  it
       is   not   necessary   to  have  them  in  the  smtpd_tls_cert_file  or
       smtpd_tls_dcert_file.

       A certificate supplied here must be usable as an SSL server certificate
       and hence pass the "openssl verify -purpose sslserver ..." test.

       Example:

       smtpd_tls_cert_file = /etc/postfix/server.pem

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_cipherlist (default: empty)
       Obsolete  Postfix  < 2.3 control for the Postfix SMTP server TLS cipher
       list. It is easy to create inter-operability  problems  by  choosing  a
       non-default cipher list. Do not use a non-default TLS cipherlist for MX
       hosts on the public Internet. Clients that begin the TLS handshake, but
       are  unable  to  agree  on a common cipher, may not be able to send any
       email to the SMTP server. Using a restricted cipher list  may  be  more
       appropriate  for  a dedicated MSA or an internal mailhub, where one can
       exert some control over the TLS software and settings of the connecting
       clients.

       Note: do not use "" quotes around the parameter value.

       This feature is available with Postfix version 2.2. It is not used with
       Postfix 2.3 and later; use smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers instead.

smtpd_tls_dcert_file (default: empty)
       File with the Postfix SMTP server DSA certificate in PEM format.   This
       file may also contain the Postfix SMTP server private DSA key.

       See the discussion under smtpd_tls_cert_file for more details.

       Example:

       smtpd_tls_dcert_file = /etc/postfix/server-dsa.pem

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_dh1024_param_file (default: empty)
       File  with  DH  parameters that the Postfix SMTP server should use with
       EDH ciphers.

       Instead of using the exact same  parameter  sets  as  distributed  with
       other  TLS  packages,  it  is  more  secure to generate your own set of
       parameters with something like the following command:

           openssl gendh -out /etc/postfix/dh_1024.pem -2 1024

       Your actual source for entropy may differ. Some systems have  /dev/ran-
       dom; on other system you may consider using the "Entropy Gathering Dae-
       mon EGD", available at http://egd.sourceforge.net/

       Example:

       smtpd_tls_dh1024_param_file = /etc/postfix/dh_1024.pem

       This feature is available with Postfix version 2.2.

smtpd_tls_dh512_param_file (default: empty)
       File with DH parameters that the Postfix SMTP server  should  use  with
       EDH ciphers.

       See  also the discussion under the smtpd_tls_dh1024_param_file configu-
       ration parameter.

       Example:

       smtpd_tls_dh512_param_file = /etc/postfix/dh_512.pem

       This feature is available with Postfix version 2.2.

smtpd_tls_dkey_file (default: $smtpd_tls_dcert_file)
       File with the Postfix SMTP server DSA private key in PEM format.   This
       file  may be combined with the Postfix SMTP server DSA certificate file
       specified with $smtpd_tls_dcert_file.

       The private key must be accessible without a pass-phrase, i.e. it  must
       not  be  encrypted, but file permissions should grant read/write access
       only to the system superuser account ("root").

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
       List of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the SMTP server  cipher
       list  at  all  TLS  security levels. Excluding valid ciphers can create
       interoperability problems. DO NOT exclude ciphers unless it  is  essen-
       tial  to  do so. This is not an OpenSSL cipherlist; it is a simple list
       separated by whitespace  and/or  commas.  The  elements  are  a  single
       cipher,  or  one or more "+" separated cipher properties, in which case
       only ciphers matching all the properties are excluded.

       Examples (some of these will cause problems):

           smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers = aNULL
           smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers = MD5, DES
           smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers = DES+MD5
           smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers = AES256-SHA, DES-CBC3-MD5
           smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers = kEDH+aRSA

       The first setting disables anonymous ciphers. The next setting disables
       ciphers  that  use the MD5 digest algorithm or the (single) DES encryp-
       tion algorithm. The next setting disables ciphers that use MD5 and  DES
       together.   The  next setting disables the two ciphers "AES256-SHA" and
       "DES-CBC3-MD5". The last setting disables ciphers that  use  "EDH"  key
       exchange with RSA authentication.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest (default: md5)
       The  message digest algorithm used to construct client-certificate fin-
       gerprints  for  check_ccert_access  and   permit_tls_clientcerts.   The
       default  algorithm  is  md5,  for  backwards compatibility with Postfix
       releases prior to 2.5.

       The best practice algorithm is now sha1. Recent advances in hash  func-
       tion  cryptanalysis  have led to md5 being deprecated in favor of sha1.
       However, as long as there  are  no  known  "second  pre-image"  attacks
       against md5, its use in this context can still be considered safe.

       While  additional  digest algorithms are often available with OpenSSL's
       libcrypto, only those used by libssl in SSL cipher suites are available
       to Postfix. For now this means just md5 or sha1.

       To find the fingerprint of a specific certificate file, with a specific
       digest algorithm, run:

           $ openssl x509 -noout -fingerprint -digest -in certfile.pem

       The text to the right of "=" sign  is  the  desired  fingerprint.   For
       example:

           $ openssl x509 -noout -fingerprint -sha1 -in cert.pem
           SHA1 Fingerprint=D4:6A:AB:19:24:79:F8:32:BB:A6:CB:66:82:C0:8E:9B:EE:29:A8:1A

       Example: client-certificate access table, with sha1 fingerprints:

           /etc/postfix/main.cf:
               smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest = sha1
               smtpd_client_restrictions =
                   check_ccert_access hash:/etc/postfix/access,
                   reject
           /etc/postfix/access:
               # Action folded to next line...
               AF:88:7C:AD:51:95:6F:36:96:F6:01:FB:2E:48:CD:AB:49:25:A2:3B
                   OK
               85:16:78:FD:73:6E:CE:70:E0:31:5F:0D:3C:C8:6D:C4:2C:24:59:E1
                   permit_auth_destination

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtpd_tls_key_file (default: $smtpd_tls_cert_file)
       File  with the Postfix SMTP server RSA private key in PEM format.  This
       file may be combined with the Postfix SMTP server RSA certificate  file
       specified with $smtpd_tls_cert_file.

       The  private key must be accessible without a pass-phrase, i.e. it must
       not be encrypted, but file permissions should grant  read/write  access
       only to the system superuser account ("root").

smtpd_tls_loglevel (default: 0)
       Enable  additional  Postfix  SMTP server logging of TLS activity.  Each
       logging level also includes the information that is logged at  a  lower
       logging level.

              0 Disable logging of TLS activity.

              1 Log TLS handshake and certificate information.

              2 Log levels during TLS negotiation.

              3 Log hexadecimal and ASCII dump of TLS negotiation process.

              4  Also  log hexadecimal and ASCII dump of complete transmission
              after STARTTLS.

       Use "smtpd_tls_loglevel = 3" only in case of problems. Use of  loglevel
       4 is strongly discouraged.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers (default: medium)
       The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix SMTP server will use with
       mandatory TLS  encryption.  Cipher  types  listed  in  smtpd_tls_manda-
       tory_exclude_ciphers or smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers are excluded from the
       base definition of the selected cipher grade.  With  opportunistic  TLS
       encryption,  the "export" grade is used unconditionally with exclusions
       specified only via smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers.

       The following cipher grades are supported:

       export Enable the mainstream "EXPORT" grade or better OpenSSL  ciphers.
              This is the most appropriate setting for public MX hosts, and is
              always used with opportunistic TLS  encryption.  The  underlying
              cipherlist is specified via the tls_export_cipherlist configura-
              tion parameter, which you are strongly encouraged to not change.
              The  default  value  of tls_export_cipherlist includes anonymous
              ciphers, but these are automatically filtered out if the  server
              is configured to ask for client certificates. If you must always
              exclude  anonymous  ciphers,  set  "smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers  =
              aNULL".  To exclude anonymous ciphers only when TLS is enforced,
              set "smtpd_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers = aNULL".

       low    Enable the mainstream "LOW" grade or better OpenSSL ciphers. The
              underlying  cipherlist  is  specified via the tls_low_cipherlist
              configuration parameter, which you are  strongly  encouraged  to
              not  change.  The  default  value of tls_low_cipherlist includes
              anonymous ciphers, but these are automatically filtered  out  if
              the  server is configured to ask for client certificates. If you
              must     always     exclude     anonymous      ciphers,      set
              "smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers   =   aNULL".  To  exclude  anonymous
              ciphers  only  when  TLS  is  enforced,  set   "smtpd_tls_manda-
              tory_exclude_ciphers = aNULL".

       medium Enable  the mainstream "MEDIUM" grade or better OpenSSL ciphers.
              These are essentially the 128-bit or stronger ciphers.  This  is
              the  default minimum strength for mandatory TLS encryption. MSAs
              that enforce TLS and  have  clients  that  do  not  support  any
              "MEDIUM" or "HIGH" grade ciphers, may need to configure a weaker
              ("low"  or  "export")  minimum  cipher  grade.  The   underlying
              cipherlist is specified via the tls_medium_cipherlist configura-
              tion parameter, which you are strongly encouraged to not change.
              The  default  value  of tls_medium_cipherlist includes anonymous
              ciphers, but these are automatically filtered out if the  server
              is configured to ask for client certificates. If you must always
              exclude  anonymous  ciphers,  set  "smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers  =
              aNULL".  To exclude anonymous ciphers only when TLS is enforced,
              set "smtpd_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers = aNULL".

       high   Enable only the mainstream "HIGH"  grade  OpenSSL  ciphers.  The
              underlying  cipherlist  is specified via the tls_high_cipherlist
              configuration parameter, which you are  strongly  encouraged  to
              not  change.  The  default value of tls_high_cipherlist includes
              anonymous ciphers, but these are automatically filtered  out  if
              the  server is configured to ask for client certificates. If you
              must     always     exclude     anonymous      ciphers,      set
              "smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers   =   aNULL".  To  exclude  anonymous
              ciphers  only  when  TLS  is  enforced,  set   "smtpd_tls_manda-
              tory_exclude_ciphers = aNULL".

       null   Enable  only the "NULL" OpenSSL ciphers, these provide authenti-
              cation without encryption.  This setting is only appropriate  in
              the  rare case that all clients are prepared to use NULL ciphers
              (not normally enabled in TLS clients). The underlying cipherlist
              is  specified  via the tls_null_cipherlist configuration parame-
              ter, which you  are  strongly  encouraged  to  not  change.  The
              default  value of tls_null_cipherlist excludes anonymous ciphers
              (OpenSSL 0.9.8 has NULL ciphers that offer data integrity  with-
              out encryption or authentication).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
       Additional  list  of  ciphers  or cipher types to exclude from the SMTP
       server cipher list at mandatory TLS security levels. This list works in
       addition  to  the exclusions listed with smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers (see
       there for syntax details).

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols (default: SSLv3, TLSv1)
       The SSL/TLS protocols accepted by the Postfix SMTP server  with  manda-
       tory  TLS  encryption.  If  the  list is empty, the server supports all
       available SSL/TLS protocol versions.  A non-empty value is  a  list  of
       protocol names separated by whitespace, commas or colons. The supported
       protocol names are "SSLv2", "SSLv3" and "TLSv1", and are not case  sen-
       sitive.

       With  Postfix >= 2.5 the parameter syntax is expanded to support proto-
       col exclusions.  One  can  now  explicitly  exclude  SSLv2  by  setting
       "smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols  =  !SSLv2".  To  exclude both SSLv2 and
       SSLv3 set "smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3". Listing the
       protocols  to  include, rather than protocols to exclude, is still sup-
       ported, use the form you find more intuitive.

       Since SSL version 2 has known protocol weaknesses  and  is  now  depre-
       cated,  the  default  setting  excludes  "SSLv2".   This  means that by
       default, SSL version 2 will not  be  used  at  the  "encrypt"  security
       level.

       Example:

       smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols = TLSv1
       # Alternative form with Postfix >= 2.5:
       smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_received_header (default: no)
       Request  that the Postfix SMTP server produces Received:  message head-
       ers that include information about the protocol  and  cipher  used,  as
       well as the client CommonName and client certificate issuer CommonName.
       This is disabled by default, as the  information  may  be  modified  in
       transit through other mail servers.  Only information that was recorded
       by the final destination can be trusted.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_req_ccert (default: no)
       With mandatory TLS encryption, require a  trusted  remote  SMTP  client
       certificate  in order to allow TLS connections to proceed.  This option
       implies "smtpd_tls_ask_ccert = yes".

       When TLS encryption is optional, this setting is ignored with a warning
       written to the mail log.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_security_level (default: empty)
       The  SMTP  TLS  security level for the Postfix SMTP server; when a non-
       empty value  is  specified,  this  overrides  the  obsolete  parameters
       smtpd_use_tls  and  smtpd_enforce_tls.  This  parameter is ignored with
       "smtpd_tls_wrappermode = yes".

       Specify one of the following security levels:

       none   TLS will not be used.

       may    Opportunistic TLS: announce STARTTLS support  to  SMTP  clients,
              but do not require that clients use TLS encryption.

       encrypt
              Mandatory  TLS  encryption:  announce  STARTTLS  support to SMTP
              clients, and require that clients use TLS encryption.  According
              to  RFC 2487 this MUST NOT be applied in case of a publicly-ref-
              erenced SMTP server. Instead, this option should be used only on
              dedicated servers.

       Note  1:  the  "fingerprint", "verify" and "secure" levels are not sup-
       ported here.  The Postfix SMTP server logs a warning and uses "encrypt"
       instead.  To verify SMTP client certificates, see TLS_README for a dis-
       cussion  of  the  smtpd_tls_ask_ccert,  smtpd_tls_req_ccert,  and  per-
       mit_tls_clientcerts features.

       Note  2:  The  parameter  setting  "smtpd_tls_security_level = encrypt"
       implies "smtpd_tls_auth_only = yes".

       Note 3: when invoked via  "sendmail  -bs",  Postfix  will  never  offer
       STARTTLS  due  to  insufficient privileges to access the server private
       key. This is intended behavior.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_session_cache_database (default: empty)
       Name of the file containing the optional Postfix SMTP server  TLS  ses-
       sion  cache. Specify a database type that supports enumeration, such as
       btree or sdbm; there is no need to support concurrent access.  The file
       is  created if it does not exist. The smtpd(8) daemon does not use this
       parameter directly, rather the cache is implemented indirectly  in  the
       tlsmgr(8)  daemon.  This  means that per-smtpd-instance master.cf over-
       rides of this parameter are not effective. Note, that each of the cache
       databases supported by tlsmgr(8) daemon: $smtpd_tls_session_cache_data-
       base, $smtp_tls_session_cache_database (and with Postfix 2.3 and  later
       $lmtp_tls_session_cache_database), needs to be stored separately. It is
       not at this time possible to store multiple caches in  a  single  data-
       base.

       Note:  dbm  databases  are  not  suitable.  TLS session objects are too
       large.

       As of version 2.5, Postfix no longer uses root privileges when  opening
       this  file.  The  file  should  now  be  stored under the Postfix-owned
       data_directory. As a migration aid, an attempt to open the file under a
       non-Postfix  directory  is  redirected to the Postfix-owned data_direc-
       tory, and a warning is logged.

       Example:

       smtpd_tls_session_cache_database = btree:/var/db/postfix/smtpd_scache

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_session_cache_timeout (default: 3600s)
       The expiration time of Postfix SMTP server TLS session  cache  informa-
       tion.  A  cache cleanup is performed periodically every $smtpd_tls_ses-
       sion_cache_timeout seconds. As with  $smtpd_tls_session_cache_database,
       this  parameter  is  implemented  in the tlsmgr(8) daemon and therefore
       per-smtpd-instance master.cf overrides are not possible.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_wrappermode (default: no)
       Run the Postfix SMTP server in the non-standard "wrapper" mode, instead
       of using the STARTTLS command.

       If  you  want  to  support  this service, enable a special port in mas-
       ter.cf, and specify "-o smtpd_tls_wrappermode=yes" on the SMTP server's
       command line. Port 465 (smtps) was once chosen for this purpose.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_use_tls (default: no)
       Opportunistic  TLS:  announce  STARTTLS support to SMTP clients, but do
       not require that clients use TLS encryption.

       Note: when invoked via "sendmail -bs", Postfix will never offer  START-
       TLS  due  to  insufficient privileges to access the server private key.
       This is intended behavior.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.  With  Postfix  2.3
       and later use smtpd_tls_security_level instead.

soft_bounce (default: no)
       Safety  net to keep mail queued that would otherwise be returned to the
       sender.  This parameter disables locally-generated  bounces,  and  pre-
       vents  the  Postfix  SMTP  server  from  rejecting mail permanently, by
       changing 5xx reply codes into 4xx.  However, soft_bounce is no cure for
       address rewriting mistakes or mail routing mistakes.

       Example:

       soft_bounce = yes

stale_lock_time (default: 500s)
       The  time  after  which  a stale exclusive mailbox lockfile is removed.
       This is used for delivery to file or mailbox.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

stress (default: empty)
       This feature is documented in the STRESS_README document.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

strict_7bit_headers (default: no)
       Reject  mail  with 8-bit text in message headers. This blocks mail from
       poorly written applications.

       This feature should not be enabled on a general  purpose  mail  server,
       because it is likely to reject legitimate email.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

strict_8bitmime (default: no)
       Enable both strict_7bit_headers and strict_8bitmime_body.

       This  feature  should  not be enabled on a general purpose mail server,
       because it is likely to reject legitimate email.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

strict_8bitmime_body (default: no)
       Reject 8-bit message body text  without  8-bit  MIME  content  encoding
       information.  This blocks mail from poorly written applications.

       Unfortunately,  this  also rejects majordomo approval requests when the
       included request contains valid 8-bit MIME mail, and it rejects bounces
       from  mailers  that do not MIME encapsulate 8-bit content (for example,
       bounces from qmail or from old versions of Postfix).

       This feature should not be enabled on a general  purpose  mail  server,
       because it is likely to reject legitimate email.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

strict_mailbox_ownership (default: yes)
       Defer  delivery when a mailbox file is not owned by its recipient.  The
       default setting is not backwards compatible.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5.3 and later.

strict_mime_encoding_domain (default: no)
       Reject mail with invalid Content-Transfer-Encoding: information for the
       message/*  or  multipart/*  MIME  content types.  This blocks mail from
       poorly written software.

       This feature should not be enabled on a general  purpose  mail  server,
       because it will reject mail after a single violation.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

strict_rfc821_envelopes (default: no)
       Require  that addresses received in SMTP MAIL FROM and RCPT TO commands
       are enclosed with <>, and that those addresses do not contain  RFC  822
       style  comments  or phrases.  This stops mail from poorly written soft-
       ware.

       By default, the Postfix SMTP server accepts RFC 822 syntax in MAIL FROM
       and RCPT TO addresses.

sun_mailtool_compatibility (default: no)
       Obsolete  SUN  mailtool  compatibility  feature.  Instead,  use  "mail-
       box_delivery_lock = dotlock".

swap_bangpath (default: yes)
       Enable the rewriting of "site!user" into "user@site".  This  is  neces-
       sary  if  your machine is connected to UUCP networks.  It is enabled by
       default.

       Note: with Postfix version 2.2, message header address  rewriting  hap-
       pens only when one of the following conditions is true:

       o      The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

       o      The  message  is  received  from  a  network client that matches
              $local_header_rewrite_clients,

       o      The  message   is   received   from   the   network,   and   the
              remote_header_rewrite_domain  parameter  specifies  a  non-empty
              value.

       To   get   the   behavior   before   Postfix   version   2.2,   specify
       "local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

       Example:

       swap_bangpath = no

syslog_facility (default: mail)
       The  syslog  facility of Postfix logging. Specify a facility as defined
       in syslog.conf(5). The default facility is "mail".

       Warning: a non-default syslog_facility setting takes effect only  after
       a  Postfix process has completed initialization.  Errors during process
       initialization will be logged with the default facility.  Examples  are
       errors  while  parsing  the  command  line  arguments, and errors while
       accessing the Postfix main.cf configuration file.

syslog_name (default: postfix)
       The mail system name that is prepended to the process  name  in  syslog
       records, so that "smtpd" becomes, for example, "postfix/smtpd".

       Warning:  a  non-default  syslog_name setting takes effect only after a
       Postfix process has completed  initialization.  Errors  during  process
       initialization  will  be  logged  with  the  default name. Examples are
       errors while parsing the  command  line  arguments,  and  errors  while
       accessing the Postfix main.cf configuration file.

tls_daemon_random_bytes (default: 32)
       The  number  of pseudo-random bytes that an smtp(8) or smtpd(8) process
       requests from the tlsmgr(8) server in order to seed its internal pseudo
       random number generator (PRNG).  The default of 32 bytes (equivalent to
       256 bits) is sufficient to generate a 128bit (or 168bit) session key.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

tls_export_cipherlist (default: ALL:+RC4:@STRENGTH)
       The OpenSSL cipherlist for  "EXPORT"  or  higher  grade  ciphers.  This
       defines  the  meaning  of  the  "export"  setting  in  smtpd_tls_manda-
       tory_ciphers,    smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers     and     lmtp_tls_manda-
       tory_ciphers.  This is the cipherlist for the opportunistic ("may") TLS
       client security level and  is  the  default  cipherlist  for  the  SMTP
       server. You are strongly encouraged to not change this setting.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

tls_high_cipherlist (default: ALL:!EXPORT:!LOW:!MEDIUM:+RC4:@STRENGTH)
       The OpenSSL cipherlist for "HIGH" grade ciphers. This defines the mean-
       ing   of   the   "high"   setting    in    smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers,
       smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers   and  lmtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers.  You  are
       strongly encouraged to not change this setting.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

tls_low_cipherlist (default: ALL:!EXPORT:+RC4:@STRENGTH)
       The OpenSSL cipherlist for "LOW" or higher grade ciphers. This  defines
       the  meaning  of  the  "low"  setting  in  smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers,
       smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers  and  lmtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers.  You   are
       strongly encouraged to not change this setting.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

tls_medium_cipherlist (default: ALL:!EXPORT:!LOW:+RC4:@STRENGTH)
       The  OpenSSL  cipherlist  for  "MEDIUM"  or  higher grade ciphers. This
       defines  the  meaning  of  the  "medium"  setting  in  smtpd_tls_manda-
       tory_ciphers,     smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers     and    lmtp_tls_manda-
       tory_ciphers. This is the default cipherlist for mandatory TLS  encryp-
       tion  in the TLS client (with anonymous ciphers disabled when verifying
       server certificates). You are strongly encouraged to  not  change  this
       setting.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

tls_null_cipherlist (default: eNULL:!aNULL)
       The  OpenSSL cipherlist for "NULL" grade ciphers that provide authenti-
       cation without encryption. This defines the meaning of the "null"  set-
       ting  in  smtpd_mandatory_tls_ciphers,  smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers  and
       lmtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers.  You are strongly encouraged to not  change
       this setting.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

tls_random_bytes (default: 32)
       The  number  of bytes that tlsmgr(8) reads from $tls_random_source when
       (re)seeding the in-memory pseudo random number generator  (PRNG)  pool.
       The  default of 32 bytes (256 bits) is good enough for 128bit symmetric
       keys.  If using EGD or a device file, a maximum of 255 bytes is read.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

tls_random_exchange_name (default: see postconf -d output)
       Name of the pseudo random number generator (PRNG) state  file  that  is
       maintained  by  tlsmgr(8).  The file is created when it does not exist,
       and its length is fixed at 1024 bytes.

       As of version 2.5, Postfix no longer uses root privileges when  opening
       this  file,  and  the  default  file  location  was changed from ${con-
       fig_directory}/prng_exch to ${data_directory}/prng_exch.  As  a  migra-
       tion  aid, an attempt to open the file under a non-Postfix directory is
       redirected to  the  Postfix-owned  data_directory,  and  a  warning  is
       logged.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

tls_random_prng_update_period (default: 3600s)
       The  time between attempts by tlsmgr(8) to save the state of the pseudo
       random number generator (PRNG) to the  file  specified  with  $tls_ran-
       dom_exchange_name.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

tls_random_reseed_period (default: 3600s)
       The maximal time between attempts by tlsmgr(8) to re-seed the in-memory
       pseudo random number generator (PRNG) pool from external sources.   The
       actual  time  between re-seeding attempts is calculated using the PRNG,
       and is between 0 and the time specified.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

tls_random_source (default: see postconf -d output)
       The external entropy source for the in-memory tlsmgr(8)  pseudo  random
       number generator (PRNG) pool. Be sure to specify a non-blocking source.
       If this source is not a regular file, the entropy source type  must  be
       prepended:   egd:/path/to/egd_socket  for  a source with EGD compatible
       socket interface, or dev:/path/to/device for a device file.

       Note: on OpenBSD systems specify /dev/arandom when  /dev/urandom  gives
       timeout errors.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

trace_service_name (default: trace)
       The  name  of  the  trace  service.  This service is implemented by the
       bounce(8) daemon and maintains a record of mail deliveries and produces
       a  mail  delivery report when verbose delivery is requested with "send-
       mail -v".

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

transport_delivery_slot_cost (default: $default_delivery_slot_cost)
       A transport-specific override for the default_delivery_slot_cost param-
       eter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message deliv-
       ery transport.

transport_delivery_slot_discount (default: $default_delivery_slot_discount)
       A transport-specific override  for  the  default_delivery_slot_discount
       parameter  value,  where transport is the master.cf name of the message
       delivery transport.

transport_delivery_slot_loan (default: $default_delivery_slot_loan)
       A transport-specific override for the default_delivery_slot_loan param-
       eter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message deliv-
       ery transport.

transport_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit (default:  $default_des-
       tination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit)
       A   transport-specific  override  for  the  default_destination_concur-
       rency_failed_cohort_limit parameter value, where transport is the  mas-
       ter.cf name of the message delivery transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

transport_destination_concurrency_limit (default: $default_destination_concur-
       rency_limit)
       A  transport-specific  override  for  the   default_destination_concur-
       rency_limit  parameter  value, where transport is the master.cf name of
       the message delivery transport.

transport_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback (default:  $default_desti-
       nation_concurrency_negative_feedback)
       A   transport-specific  override  for  the  default_destination_concur-
       rency_negative_feedback parameter value, where transport  is  the  mas-
       ter.cf name of the message delivery transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

transport_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback  (default: $default_desti-
       nation_concurrency_positive_feedback)
       A  transport-specific  override  for  the   default_destination_concur-
       rency_positive_feedback  parameter  value,  where transport is the mas-
       ter.cf name of the message delivery transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

transport_destination_rate_delay (default: $default_destination_rate_delay)
       A transport-specific override  for  the  default_destination_rate_delay
       parameter  value,  where transport is the master.cf name of the message
       delivery transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

transport_destination_recipient_limit  (default:  $default_destination_recipi-
       ent_limit)
       A   transport-specific  override  for  the  default_destination_recipi-
       ent_limit parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the
       message delivery transport.

transport_extra_recipient_limit (default: $default_extra_recipient_limit)
       A  transport-specific  override  for  the default_extra_recipient_limit
       parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of  the  message
       delivery transport.

transport_initial_destination_concurrency  (default: $initial_destination_con-
       currency)
       A transport-specific override for  the  initial_destination_concurrency
       parameter  value,  where transport is the master.cf name of the message
       delivery transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

transport_maps (default: empty)
       Optional lookup tables with mappings from recipient address to (message
       delivery   transport,  next-hop  destination).   See  transport(5)  for
       details.

       Specify zero or more "type:table" lookup tables.  If you use this  fea-
       ture  with local files, run "postmap /etc/postfix/transport" after mak-
       ing a change.

       For safety reasons, as of Postfix 2.3 this feature does not allow $num-
       ber substitutions in regular expression maps.

       Examples:

       transport_maps = dbm:/etc/postfix/transport
       transport_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/transport

transport_minimum_delivery_slots (default: $default_minimum_delivery_slots)
       A  transport-specific  override  for the default_minimum_delivery_slots
       parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of  the  message
       delivery transport.

transport_recipient_limit (default: $default_recipient_limit)
       A transport-specific override for the default_recipient_limit parameter
       value, where transport is the master.cf name of  the  message  delivery
       transport.

transport_recipient_refill_delay (default: $default_recipient_refill_delay)
       A  transport-specific  override  for the default_recipient_refill_delay
       parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of  the  message
       delivery transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

transport_recipient_refill_limit (default: $default_recipient_refill_limit)
       A  transport-specific  override  for the default_recipient_refill_limit
       parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of  the  message
       delivery transport.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

transport_retry_time (default: 60s)
       The  time  between  attempts  by the Postfix queue manager to contact a
       malfunctioning message delivery transport.

       Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days),  w  (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

transport_time_limit (default: $command_time_limit)
       A  transport-specific  override  for  the  command_time_limit parameter
       value, where transport is the master.cf name of  the  message  delivery
       transport.

trigger_timeout (default: 10s)
       The  time limit for sending a trigger to a Postfix daemon (for example,
       the pickup(8) or qmgr(8) daemon). This  time  limit  prevents  programs
       from getting stuck when the mail system is under heavy load.

       Time  units:  s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
       The default time unit is s (seconds).

undisclosed_recipients_header (default: To: undisclosed-recipients:;)
       Message header that the Postfix cleanup(8) server inserts when  a  mes-
       sage contains no To: or Cc: message header.

unknown_address_reject_code (default: 450)
       The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a sender or recip-
       ient  address  is  rejected  by  the  reject_unknown_sender_domain   or
       reject_unknown_recipient_domain  restriction.   The  response is always
       450 in case of a temporary DNS error.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

unknown_client_reject_code (default: 450)
       The  numerical  Postfix SMTP server response code when a client without
       valid   address   <=>    name    mapping    is    rejected    by    the
       reject_unknown_client_hostname  restriction.  The  SMTP  server  always
       replies with 450 when the mapping failed due to a temporary error  con-
       dition.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

unknown_hostname_reject_code (default: 450)
       The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when the hostname spec-
       ified   with   the   HELO   or   EHLO   command   is  rejected  by  the
       reject_unknown_helo_hostname restriction.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

unknown_local_recipient_reject_code (default: 550)
       The  numerical  Postfix  SMTP  server  response  code  when a recipient
       address is local, and $local_recipient_maps specifies a list of  lookup
       tables that does not match the recipient.  A recipient address is local
       when  its   domain   matches   $mydestination,   $proxy_interfaces   or
       $inet_interfaces.

       The  default  setting is 550 (reject mail) but it is safer to initially
       use 450 (try again later)  so  you  have  time  to  find  out  if  your
       local_recipient_maps settings are OK.

       Example:

       unknown_local_recipient_reject_code = 450

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

unknown_relay_recipient_reject_code (default: 550)
       The  numerical  Postfix SMTP server reply code when a recipient address
       matches $relay_domains, and relay_recipient_maps specifies  a  list  of
       lookup tables that does not match the recipient address.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

unknown_virtual_alias_reject_code (default: 550)
       The  SMTP  server  reply  code  when  a recipient address matches $vir-
       tual_alias_domains, and $virtual_alias_maps specifies a list of  lookup
       tables that does not match the recipient address.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

unknown_virtual_mailbox_reject_code (default: 550)
       The  SMTP  server  reply  code  when  a recipient address matches $vir-
       tual_mailbox_domains, and $virtual_mailbox_maps  specifies  a  list  of
       lookup tables that does not match the recipient address.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

unverified_recipient_reject_code (default: 450)
       The  numerical Postfix SMTP server response when a recipient address is
       rejected by the reject_unverified_recipient restriction.

       Unlike elsewhere in Postfix, you can specify 250 in order to accept the
       address anyway.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

unverified_sender_reject_code (default: 450)
       The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a  sender  address
       is rejected by the reject_unverified_sender restriction.

       Unlike elsewhere in Postfix, you can specify 250 in order to accept the
       address anyway.

       Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC 821.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

verp_delimiter_filter (default: -=+)
       The  characters  Postfix  accepts  as  VERP delimiter characters on the
       Postfix sendmail(1) command line and in SMTP commands.

       This feature is available in Postfix 1.1 and later.

virtual_alias_domains (default: $virtual_alias_maps)
       Postfix is final destination for the specified list  of  virtual  alias
       domains,  that  is,  domains  for  which  all  addresses are aliased to
       addresses in other local or remote domains. The SMTP  server  validates
       recipient  addresses  with $virtual_alias_maps and rejects non-existent
       recipients.  See  also  the  virtual  alias   domain   class   in   the
       ADDRESS_CLASS_README file

       This  feature  is available in Postfix 2.0 and later. The default value
       is backwards compatible with Postfix version 1.1.

       The default value is $virtual_alias_maps  so  that  you  can  keep  all
       information about virtual alias domains in one place.  If you have many
       users, it is better to separate  information  that  changes  more  fre-
       quently  (virtual  address  ->  local  or  remote address mapping) from
       information that changes less frequently (the list  of  virtual  domain
       names).

       Specify  a  list  of host or domain names, "/file/name" or "type:table"
       patterns, separated by commas and/or whitespace. A "/file/name" pattern
       is  replaced  by  its  contents; a "type:table" lookup table is matched
       when a table entry matches  a  lookup  string  (the  lookup  result  is
       ignored).   Continue  long  lines by starting the next line with white-
       space. Specify "!pattern" to exclude a host or  domain  name  from  the
       list.  The  form "!/file/name" is supported only in Postfix version 2.4
       and later.

       See also the VIRTUAL_README and ADDRESS_CLASS_README documents for fur-
       ther information.

       Example:

       virtual_alias_domains = virtual1.tld virtual2.tld

virtual_alias_expansion_limit (default: 1000)
       The  maximal  number of addresses that virtual alias expansion produces
       from each original recipient.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

virtual_alias_maps (default: $virtual_maps)
       Optional lookup tables that alias specific mail addresses or domains to
       other  local or remote address.  The table format and lookups are docu-
       mented in virtual(5). For an overview of Postfix address  manipulations
       see the ADDRESS_REWRITING_README document.

       This  feature  is available in Postfix 2.0 and later. The default value
       is backwards compatible with Postfix version 1.1.

       If you use this feature with indexed  files,  run  "postmap  /etc/post-
       fix/virtual" after changing the file.

       Examples:

       virtual_alias_maps = dbm:/etc/postfix/virtual
       virtual_alias_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/virtual

virtual_alias_recursion_limit (default: 1000)
       The  maximal  nesting  depth of virtual alias expansion.  Currently the
       recursion limit is applied only to the left  branch  of  the  expansion
       graph,  so the depth of the tree can in the worst case reach the sum of
       the expansion and recursion limits.  This may change in the future.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

virtual_destination_concurrency_limit  (default:  $default_destination_concur-
       rency_limit)
       The  maximal  number of parallel deliveries to the same destination via
       the virtual message delivery transport. This limit is enforced  by  the
       queue  manager.  The message delivery transport name is the first field
       in the entry in the master.cf file.

virtual_destination_recipient_limit   (default:   $default_destination_recipi-
       ent_limit)
       The  maximal  number of recipients per delivery via the virtual message
       delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the  queue  manager.  The
       message  delivery transport name is the first field in the entry in the
       master.cf file.

       Setting this parameter to a value of 1  changes  the  meaning  of  vir-
       tual_destination_concurrency_limit  from  concurrency  per  domain into
       concurrency per recipient.

virtual_gid_maps (default: empty)
       Lookup tables with the per-recipient group ID  for  virtual(8)  mailbox
       delivery.

       In  a  lookup table, specify a left-hand side of "@domain.tld" to match
       any user in  the  specified  domain  that  does  not  have  a  specific
       "user@domain.tld" entry.

       When   a   recipient   address   has   an  optional  address  extension
       (user+foo@domain.tld), the virtual(8) delivery agent looks up the  full
       address  first,  and  when the lookup fails, it looks up the unextended
       address (user@domain.tld).

       Note 1: for security reasons, the virtual(8) delivery  agent  disallows
       regular expression substitution of $1 etc. in regular expression lookup
       tables, because that would open a security hole.

       Note 2: for  security  reasons,  the  virtual(8)  delivery  agent  will
       silently ignore requests to use the proxymap(8) server. Instead it will
       open the table directly. Before Postfix  version  2.2,  the  virtual(8)
       delivery agent will terminate with a fatal error.

virtual_mailbox_base (default: empty)
       A  prefix  that  the virtual(8) delivery agent prepends to all pathname
       results from $virtual_mailbox_maps table lookups.   This  is  a  safety
       measure  to  ensure  that an out of control map doesn't litter the file
       system with mailboxes.  While virtual_mailbox_base could be set to "/",
       this setting isn't recommended.

       Example:

       virtual_mailbox_base = /var/mail

virtual_mailbox_domains (default: $virtual_mailbox_maps)
       Postfix is final destination for the specified list of domains; mail is
       delivered via  the  $virtual_transport  mail  delivery  transport.   By
       default this is the Postfix virtual(8) delivery agent.  The SMTP server
       validates recipient addresses with  $virtual_mailbox_maps  and  rejects
       mail  for non-existent recipients.  See also the virtual mailbox domain
       class in the ADDRESS_CLASS_README file.

       This parameter expects the same syntax as the mydestination  configura-
       tion parameter.

       This  feature  is available in Postfix 2.0 and later. The default value
       is backwards compatible with Postfix version 1.1.

virtual_mailbox_limit (default: 51200000)
       The maximal size in bytes of an individual mailbox or maildir file,  or
       zero (no limit).

virtual_mailbox_lock (default: see postconf -d output)
       How to lock a UNIX-style virtual(8) mailbox before attempting delivery.
       For a list of available file locking methods,  use  the  "postconf  -l"
       command.

       This  setting  is  ignored  with  maildir  style delivery, because such
       deliveries are safe without application-level locks.

       Note 1: the dotlock method requires that the recipient UID or  GID  has
       write access to the parent directory of the recipient's mailbox file.

       Note 2: the default setting of this parameter is system dependent.

virtual_mailbox_maps (default: empty)
       Optional  lookup  tables  with  all valid addresses in the domains that
       match $virtual_mailbox_domains.

       In a lookup table, specify a left-hand side of "@domain.tld"  to  match
       any  user  in  the  specified  domain  that  does  not  have a specific
       "user@domain.tld" entry.

       The virtual(8) delivery agent uses this table to look up the per-recip-
       ient mailbox or maildir pathname.  If the lookup result ends in a slash
       ("/"), maildir-style delivery is carried out,  otherwise  the  path  is
       assumed to specify a UNIX-style mailbox file.  Note that $virtual_mail-
       box_base is unconditionally prepended to this path.

       When  a  recipient  address   has   an   optional   address   extension
       (user+foo@domain.tld),  the virtual(8) delivery agent looks up the full
       address first, and when the lookup fails, it looks  up  the  unextended
       address (user@domain.tld).

       Note  1:  for security reasons, the virtual(8) delivery agent disallows
       regular expression substitution of $1 etc. in regular expression lookup
       tables, because that would open a security hole.

       Note  2:  for  security  reasons,  the  virtual(8)  delivery agent will
       silently ignore requests to use the proxymap(8) server. Instead it will
       open  the  table  directly.  Before Postfix version 2.2, the virtual(8)
       delivery agent will terminate with a fatal error.

virtual_maps (default: empty)
       Optional lookup tables with a) names of domains for which all addresses
       are  aliased  to  addresses  in  other  local or remote domains, and b)
       addresses that are aliased  to  addresses  in  other  local  or  remote
       domains.   Available  before  Postfix version 2.0. With Postfix version
       2.0  and  later,  this  is  replaced   by   separate   controls:   vir-
       tual_alias_domains and virtual_alias_maps.

virtual_minimum_uid (default: 100)
       The minimum user ID value that the virtual(8) delivery agent accepts as
       a result from $virtual_uid_maps table  lookup.   Returned  values  less
       than this will be rejected, and the message will be deferred.

virtual_transport (default: virtual)
       The  default mail delivery transport and next-hop destination for final
       delivery to domains listed with $virtual_mailbox_domains.  This  infor-
       mation can be overruled with the transport(5) table.

       Specify  a string of the form transport:nexthop, where transport is the
       name of a mail delivery transport defined in master.cf.   The  :nexthop
       part is optional.  For more details see the transport(5) manual page.

       This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

virtual_uid_maps (default: empty)
       Lookup tables with the per-recipient user ID that the virtual(8) deliv-
       ery agent uses while writing to the recipient's mailbox.

       In a lookup table, specify a left-hand side of "@domain.tld"  to  match
       any  user  in  the  specified  domain  that  does  not  have a specific
       "user@domain.tld" entry.

       When  a  recipient  address   has   an   optional   address   extension
       (user+foo@domain.tld),  the virtual(8) delivery agent looks up the full
       address first, and when the lookup fails, it looks  up  the  unextended
       address (user@domain.tld).

       Note  1:  for security reasons, the virtual(8) delivery agent disallows
       regular expression substitution of $1 etc. in regular expression lookup
       tables, because that would open a security hole.

       Note  2:  for  security  reasons,  the  virtual(8)  delivery agent will
       silently ignore requests to use the proxymap(8) server. Instead it will
       open  the  table  directly.  Before Postfix version 2.2, the virtual(8)
       delivery agent will terminate with a fatal error.

SEE ALSO
       postconf(1), Postfix configuration parameter maintenance
       master(5), Postfix daemon configuration maintenance

LICENSE
       The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.

AUTHOR(S)
       Wietse Venema
       IBM T.J. Watson Research
       P.O. Box 704
       Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA



                                                                   POSTCONF(5)

You can also request any man page by name and (optionally) by section:

Command: 
Section: 
Architecture: 
Collection: 
 

Use the DEFAULT collection to view manual pages for third-party software.


©1994 Man-cgi 1.15, Panagiotis Christias <christia@softlab.ntua.gr>
©1996-2014 Modified for NetBSD by Kimmo Suominen